CANON POWERSHOT G16 User Manual

Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Camera User Guide  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety  
Precautions” section (=8), before using the camera.  
Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera  
properly.  
Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
ENGLISH  
: Next page  
: Previous page  
: Page before you clicked a link  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter  
title at right.  
9
10  
Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the  
future.  
Appendix  
From chapter title pages, you can access topics by  
clicking their titles.  
Index  
©CANON INC. 2013  
CDD-E552-020  
1
Cover  
Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.  
: Important information you should know  
: Notes and tips for expert camera use  
Part Names and Conventions in This  
Guide  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
=xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a  
page number)  
Basic Guide  
Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.  
For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as  
the “memory card”.  
The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still  
images, movies, or both.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Still Images  
:
Indicates that the function is used when shooting or  
viewing still images.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Movies  
:
Indicates that the function is used when shooting or  
viewing movies.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Front dial  
Lamp  
Mode dial  
Hot shoe  
Playback Mode  
Lens  
<
(Flash up)> switch  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Zoom lever  
Flash  
Shooting: <i(telephoto)> /  
Speaker  
Setting Menu  
<j(wide angle)>  
Ring release button  
DC coupler cable port  
Memory card/battery cover  
Tripod socket  
Playback: <k(magnify)> /  
Accessories  
9
10  
<g(index)>  
Strap mount  
Shutter button  
Power button/lamp  
Appendix  
Index  
3
     
Cover  
zzTurning the control dial is one way to  
choose setting items, switch images, and  
perform other operations. Most of these  
operations are also possible with the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera  
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.  
The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
<7>  
<z> Front dial on front  
<o> Up button on back  
Control dial on back  
<q> Left button on back  
<r> Right button on back  
<p> Down button on back  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Wi-Fi antenna area  
(Shortcut)> button  
<+(AE lock/FE lock)> /  
(Filtering image display)>  
button  
Remote terminal  
P Mode  
<
AV OUT (Audio/video output) /  
DIGITAL terminal  
HDMITM terminal  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
<
Playback Mode  
<n> button  
<
(ISO speed)> /  
<
<
(AF frame selector)> /  
(Wi-Fi)> button  
Wi-Fi Functions  
<a(Single-image erase)> button  
Screen (LCD monitor)  
Diopter adjustment dial  
Viewfinder  
<f(Manual focus)> / Up button  
<e(Macro)> / Left button  
Control dial  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Microphone  
FUNC./SET button  
Appendix  
Indicator  
<h(Flash)> / Right button  
<l(Display)> / Down button  
Exposure compensation dial  
<1(Playback)> button  
Movie button  
Index  
4
   
Cover  
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2  
Mode.....................................91  
Table of Contents  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
2
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table of Contents...........................5  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
6
P Mode  
3
4
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
8
9
Setting Menu  
1
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
7
5
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
6
Cover  
Common Camera Operations  
Before Use  
Applying special effects  
4
Shoot  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzUse camera-determined settings  
(Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)..................................................... 29, 31  
Basic Guide  
Vivid Colors  
Poster Effect  
“Aged” Photos  
(=54)  
(=55)  
(=56)  
Advanced Guide  
Shooting people well  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I P  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Portraits  
Against Snow  
Fish-Eye Effect  
Miniature Effect  
Toy Camera Effect  
(=52)  
(=52)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
(=56)  
(=57)  
(=58)  
P Mode  
Matching specific scenes  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Background Defocus  
Soft Focus  
Monochrome  
(=58)  
(=59)  
(=59)  
Playback Mode  
S t  
Night Scenes  
Under Water  
Fireworks  
Starry Skies  
Wi-Fi Functions  
(=52)  
(=52)  
(=53)  
(=62)  
zzFocus on faces................................................................... 29, 52, 82, 84  
zzWithout using the flash (Flash Off)................................................. 29, 86  
zzInclude yourself in the shot (Self-Timer) ........................................ 36, 61  
zzAdd a date stamp................................................................................. 38  
zzUse Face ID................................................................................. 39, 105  
zzMovie clips and photos together (Movie Digest).................................. 31  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
7
 
Cover  
1
View  
Safety Precautions  
Before using the product, please ensure that you read the safety  
precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used  
correctly.  
The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended  
to prevent injuries to yourself and other persons, or damage to the  
equipment.  
Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold  
accessories you use.  
Before Use  
zzView images (Playback Mode)........................................................... 102  
zzAutomatic playback (Slideshow).........................................................110  
zzOn a TV.............................................................................................. 163  
zzOn a computer ................................................................................... 174  
zzBrowse through images quickly ......................................................... 105  
zzErase images......................................................................................114  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
E
Shoot/View Movies  
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.  
Warning  
zzShoot movies ................................................................................. 29, 65  
zzView movies (Playback Mode)........................................................... 102  
zzFast-moving subjects, slow-motion playback....................................... 66  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.  
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight.  
In particular, remain at least 1 meter (39 inches) away from infants when  
using the flash.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
c
Print  
zzPrint pictures...................................................................................... 176  
Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.  
Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation.  
Date/time battery (if removable): Dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs,  
contact a doctor immediately.  
Playback Mode  
Save  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzSave images to a computer via a cable............................................. 174  
Setting Menu  
Use only recommended power sources.  
Use Wi-Fi Functions  
Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product.  
Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.  
To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if  
it has been dropped or otherwise damaged.  
Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange  
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzSend images to a smartphone........................................................... 126  
zzShare images online .......................................................................... 127  
zzSend images to a computer............................................................... 145  
Appendix  
Index  
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to  
clean the product.  
Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water)  
or other liquids.  
8
   
Cover  
Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera.  
This could result in electrical shock or fire.  
Denotes the possibility of injury.  
Caution  
Before Use  
If liquids or foreign objects come into contact with the camera interior,  
immediately turn the camera off and remove the battery pack/batteries.  
If the battery charger (for cameras that use one) becomes wet, unplug  
it from the outlet and consult your camera retailer or a Canon Customer  
Support Help Desk.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it,  
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other  
objects.  
Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.  
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at bright  
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day.  
This could damage your eyesight.  
Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.  
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or  
clothing.  
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.  
Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.  
Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.  
If your camera uses a battery charger, note the following  
precautions.  
- Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe  
away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior  
of the power outlet, and the surrounding area.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places:  
- Places subject to direct sunlight  
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)  
- Humid or dusty areas  
These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery  
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns or other injuries.  
High temperatures may deform the product.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
- Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.  
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated  
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if  
the power cord or plug are damaged, or not fully plugged into the  
outlet.  
- Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact  
the terminals or plug.  
The battery pack/batteries may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock  
or fire. This could cause injury and damage the surroundings. In the event  
that a battery pack leaks and the battery electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth,  
skin or clothing, immediately flush with water.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed  
for prolonged periods.  
Accessories  
9
10  
When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if  
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.  
If the lens becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass  
may lead to cuts.  
Appendix  
Index  
On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure  
your finger is out of the way when the flash is lowered, to avoid  
pinching it.  
Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.  
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the  
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate  
caution when using the camera in places where use of electronic devices is  
restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.  
This could result in injury.  
9
Cover  
If your camera uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have  
different levels of charge together, do not use old and new batteries  
together, and do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals  
reversed.  
Denotes the possibility of damage to the equipment.  
Caution  
Before Use  
Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a  
clear day).  
Doing so may damage the image sensor.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
This may cause the product to malfunction.  
Basic Guide  
Do not sit down with the camera in your pocket.  
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.  
When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful  
not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.  
Advanced Guide  
On cameras that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push  
the flash down or pry it open.  
This may cause the product to malfunction.  
When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do  
not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that  
it faces the camera body), if your camera has a screen that closes.  
Do not attach any hard objects to the camera.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
In regular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the  
flash.  
This is due to the high intensity of the flash burning dust and foreign  
materials stuck to the front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove  
dirt, dust or other foreign matter from the flash to prevent heat build-up and  
damage to the unit.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using  
the camera.  
If the battery pack or batteries are left inside the camera, damage caused  
by leakage may occur.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals  
with tape or other insulators.  
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
If your camera is used with a battery charger, keep the charger  
unplugged when not in use. When charging the battery pack, do not  
leave it covered with a cloth or put other objects on it.  
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to  
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.  
Index  
Do not leave the battery pack near pets.  
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating or explosion,  
resulting in fire or damage.  
10  
Cover  
Before Use  
Basic Guide  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
playback  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Initial Preparations........................................... 12 Trying the Camera Out..................................... 16  
Attaching the Strap................................................12  
Holding the Camera ..............................................12  
Charging the Battery Pack ....................................12  
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card .......13  
Setting the Date and Time.....................................14  
Display Language .................................................16  
Shooting (Smart Auto)...........................................16  
Viewing..................................................................18  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
11  
 
Cover  
Charging the Battery Pack  
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to  
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the  
battery pack charged.  
Initial Preparations  
Before Use  
Prepare for shooting as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Attaching the Strap  
Basic Guide  
1 Insert the battery pack.  
zzAttach the included strap to the camera  
as shown.  
Advanced Guide  
zzRemove the cover from the battery, align  
the marks on the battery and charger,  
Camera Basics  
zzOn the other side of the camera, attach  
the strap the same way.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
and insert the battery by pushing it in (  
and down ( ).  
)
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Charge the battery pack.  
zzCB-2LC: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug  
the charger into a power outlet ( ).  
zzCB-2LCE: Plug the power cord into the  
charger, then plug the other end into a  
power outlet.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Holding the Camera  
zzPlace the strap around your neck.  
zzWhen shooting, keep your arms close to  
your body and hold the camera securely  
to prevent it from moving. If you have  
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers  
on it.  
Playback Mode  
CB-2LC  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzThe charging lamp turns orange and  
charging begins.  
Setting Menu  
zzWhen charging is finished, the lamp turns  
green.  
Accessories  
CB-2LCE  
9
10  
Appendix  
3 Remove the battery pack.  
zzAfter unplugging the battery charger,  
remove the battery pack by pushing it in  
Index  
(
) and up ( ).  
12  
   
Cover  
2 Open the cover.  
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not  
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.  
For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the  
charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction  
or damage to the product.  
Before Use  
zzSlide the cover ( ) and open it ( ).  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time  
3 Insert the battery pack.  
zzWhile pressing the battery lock in the  
direction of the arrow, insert the battery  
pack as shown and push it in until it clicks  
into the locked position.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not  
used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. As a  
visual reminder of the charging status, attach the battery cover with visible  
on a charged battery pack and concealed on an uncharged one.  
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For  
power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for  
the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may  
damage the battery pack.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzIf you insert the battery pack facing the  
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the  
correct position. Always confirm that the  
battery pack is facing the right way and  
locks when inserted.  
P Mode  
Terminals Battery  
Lock  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card  
4 Insert the memory card.  
zzInsert the memory card facing as shown  
until it clicks into the locked position.  
zzMake sure the memory card is facing the  
right way when you insert it. Inserting  
memory cards facing the wrong way may  
damage the camera.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).  
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted  
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera  
(=153).  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
1 Check the card’s write-protect  
tab.  
zzRecording is not possible on memory  
cards with a write-protect tab when the  
tab is in the locked (downward) position.  
Slide the tab up until it clicks into the  
unlocked position.  
Appendix  
Label  
Index  
13  
         
Cover  
Setting the Date and Time  
5 Close the cover.  
Before Use  
zzLower the cover ( ) and hold it down as  
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed  
position ( ).  
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen  
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way  
is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you  
manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.  
You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (=38).  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one  
1 Turn the camera on.  
zzPress the power button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed.  
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Remove the battery pack.  
zzOpen the cover and press the battery  
lock in the direction of the arrow.  
zzThe battery pack will pop up.  
2 Set the date and time.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
option.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to specify the date and time.  
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Remove the memory card.  
zzPush the memory card in until it clicks,  
and then slowly release it.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzThe memory card will pop up.  
Appendix  
3 Set the home time zone.  
Index  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose your home time zone.  
14  
       
Cover  
4 Finish the setup process.  
zzPress the <m> button when finished.  
After a confirmation message, the setting  
screen is no longer displayed.  
zzTo turn off the camera, press the power  
button.  
2 Choose [Date/Time].  
zzMove the zoom lever to choose the [3]  
tab.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Date/Time], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/Time]  
screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify  
the correct information.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [  
] in step 2 and then  
3 Change the date and time.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Setting the Date and  
Time” (=14) to adjust the settings.  
zzPress the <n> button to close the  
menu.  
choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning the <7> dial.  
P Mode  
Changing the Date and Time  
Adjust the date and time as follows.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
1 Access the camera menu.  
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in  
date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed.  
The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a  
charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold  
separately, =160), even if the camera is left off.  
Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be  
displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <n> button.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
15  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Display Language  
Change the display language as needed.  
Before Use  
Trying the Camera Out  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or  
movies, and then view them.  
1 Enter Playback mode.  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the <1> button.  
Shooting (Smart Auto)  
Advanced Guide  
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,  
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress and hold the <m> button, and  
then immediately press the <n>  
button.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
zzPress the power button.  
zzThe startup screen is displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Set the display language.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose a language,  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzOnce the display language has been set,  
the setting screen is no longer displayed.  
2 Enter [  
] mode.  
zzSet the mode dial to [  
Playback Mode  
].  
zzAim the camera at the subject. The  
camera will make a slight clicking noise  
as it determines the scene.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
zzIcons representing the scene and image  
stabilization mode are displayed in the  
upper left of the screen.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzFrames displayed around any detected  
subjects indicate that they are in focus.  
Index  
The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the  
<m> button before you press the <n> button. In this case, press the  
<m> button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2.  
You can also change the display language by pressing the <n> button  
and choosing [Language  
] on the [3] tab.  
16  
     
Cover  
3 Compose the shot.  
Shoot.  
Before Use  
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move  
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),  
and to zoom away from the subject, move  
it toward <j> (wide angle).  
zzPress the shutter button all the way  
down.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound  
is played, and in low-light conditions  
when you have raised the flash, it fires  
automatically.  
Basic Guide  
4 Shoot.  
Advanced Guide  
Shooting Still Images  
Focus.  
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter  
sound ends.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the shutter button lightly, halfway  
down. The camera beeps twice after  
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to  
indicate image areas in focus.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will  
revert to the shooting screen.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Shooting Movies  
Start shooting.  
P Mode  
zzPress the movie button. The camera  
beeps once as recording begins, and  
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.  
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas  
will not be recorded.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Elapsed Time  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
zzIf [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,  
move the < > switch to raise the flash.  
It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not  
to use the flash, push it down with your  
finger, into the camera.  
zzFrames displayed around any detected  
faces indicate that they are in focus.  
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger  
off the movie button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
Finish shooting.  
zzPress the movie button again to stop  
shooting. The camera beeps twice as  
recording stops.  
17  
 
Cover  
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the  
<7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the  
<7> dial to browse through images.  
zzTo return to single-image display, press  
the <m> button.  
You can make a short movie of the day (digest movie) just by shooting still  
images. When the mode dial is set to [ ], the camera automatically records  
a movie clip of the scene immediately before each shot (Hybrid Auto Mode  
(=31)).  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Viewing  
Advanced Guide  
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as  
follows.  
zzMovies are identified by a [  
play movies, go to step 3.  
] icon. To  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Enter Playback mode.  
zzPress the <1> button.  
zzYour last shot is displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Play movies.  
2 Browse through your images.  
zzTo view the previous image, press  
the <q> button or turn the <7> dial  
counterclockwise. To view the next  
image, press the <r> button or turn the  
<7> dial clockwise.  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
movie control panel, choose [ ] (either  
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button again.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
zzPlayback now begins, and after the movie  
Volume  
Accessories  
zzPress and hold the <q><r> buttons to  
browse through images quickly.  
9
10  
is finished, [  
] is displayed.  
zzTo adjust the volume, press the <o><p>  
buttons.  
Appendix  
Index  
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button  
halfway.  
18  
 
Cover  
Before Use  
Erasing the Images  
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when  
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
1 Choose an image to erase.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Erase the image.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the <a> button.  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to  
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzThe current image is now erased.  
zzTo cancel erasure, press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose  
[Cancel], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
You can also erase all images at once (=114).  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
19  
Cover  
Before Use  
Advanced Guide  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1
Camera Basics  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Practical guide that introduces other camera basics and describes shooting and playback  
options  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
On/Off................................................................ 21 Shooting Modes ............................................... 23 On-Screen Keyboard ....................................... 26  
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ........21  
Shutter Button.................................................. 22  
Playback Mode  
Shooting Display Options ............................... 23 Indicator Display .............................................. 27  
Using the FUNC. Menu .................................... 24 Clock ................................................................. 27  
Using Menus..................................................... 25  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Optical Viewfinder............................................ 22  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
20  
 
Cover  
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)  
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates  
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of  
inactivity.  
On/Off  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Shooting Mode  
zzPress the power button to turn the  
camera on and prepare for shooting.  
zzTo turn the camera off, press the power  
button again.  
Basic Guide  
Power Saving in Shooting Mode  
Advanced Guide  
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.  
In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself  
off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off  
but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (=22).  
Camera Basics  
Playback Mode  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on and view your shots.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo turn the camera off, press the <1>  
button again.  
Power Saving in Playback Mode  
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of  
inactivity.  
P Mode  
To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the <1> button.  
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button  
halfway (=22).  
The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in  
Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by  
pressing the <1> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if  
you prefer (=152).  
Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi (=124), or when connected to a computer (=174).  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
21  
       
Cover  
Shutter Button  
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter  
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all  
the way down to shoot.  
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the  
button halfway or all the way down.  
Optical Viewfinder  
To conserve battery power when shooting, you can use the optical  
viewfinder instead of the screen. Shoot the same way as when using the  
screen.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
1 Deactivate the screen.  
zzPress the <p> button several times to  
turn the screen off (=23).  
Advanced Guide  
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to  
focus.)  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Adjust the diopter.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The  
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are  
displayed around image areas in focus.  
zzAs you look through the optical  
viewfinder, turn the dial one way or the  
other so that images look sharp.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
The area visible in the optical viewfinder may differ slightly from the  
image area in your shots.  
At aspect ratios other than 4:3, the area visible in the optical  
viewfinder differs from the image area in your shots. Check the  
settings before shooting.  
2 Press all the way down. (From  
the halfway position, press fully  
to shoot.)  
Playback Mode  
zzThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound  
is played.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter  
sound ends.  
The lens may be partially visible through the optical viewfinder at some zoom  
positions.  
Although the camera automatically focuses on subjects, face detection and  
focusing is not possible.  
Continuous shooting is not supported in [  
will not determine the shooting scene.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the  
shutter button halfway.  
Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time  
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,  
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject  
moves) before the shutter sound ends.  
Appendix  
] mode, because the camera  
Index  
22  
   
Cover  
Shooting Modes  
Shooting Display Options  
Press the <p> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide  
Before Use  
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Fully automatic shooting, with  
camera-determined settings  
(=16, 29, 31).  
P, Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Modes  
Take a variety of  
shots using your  
preferred settings  
(=67, 91).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Display 1  
Display 2  
Display Off  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Special Scene Mode  
Shoot with optimal settings for  
specific scenes (=52).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Movie Mode  
For shooting movies  
(=65).  
You can also shoot  
movies when the mode  
dial is not set to Movie  
mode, simply by pressing  
the movie button.  
P Mode  
Even if the screen is off, it will turn on when you start shooting a  
movie.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Creative Filters Mode  
Add a variety of effects to images  
when shooting (=54).  
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function  
when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots  
are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the  
brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky  
subject motion will not affect recorded images.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
23  
     
Cover  
Using the FUNC. Menu  
4 Finish the setup process.  
zzPress the <m> button.  
zzThe screen before you pressed the  
<m> button in step 1 is displayed again,  
showing the option you configured.  
Before Use  
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as  
Common Camera  
Operations  
follows.  
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode  
(=195 197).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default  
settings (=157).  
1 Access the FUNC. menu.  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <m> button.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a menu item.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose a  
menu item.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzAvailable options are shown at the bottom  
of the screen.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Options  
Menu Items  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
3 Choose an option.  
9
10  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an option.  
Appendix  
zzOptions labeled with a [  
] icon can  
Index  
be configured by pressing the <n>  
button.  
zzOptions labeled with a [ ] icon can be  
configured by pressing the < > button.  
zzOptions labeled with a [ ] icon can be  
configured by pressing the < > button.  
24  
   
Cover  
Using Menus  
Configure a variety of camera functions through other menus as follows.  
Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [4],  
playback [1], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending  
on the selected shooting or playback mode (=198 202).  
3 Choose a menu item.  
Before Use  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose a menu item.  
zzFor menu items with options not shown,  
first press the <m> or <r> button to  
switch screens, and then either press the  
<o><p> buttons or turn the <7> dial to  
select the menu item.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Access the menu.  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <n> button.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzTo return to the previous screen, press  
the <n> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a tab.  
4 Choose an option.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
option.  
P Mode  
zzMove the zoom lever to choose a tab.  
zzAfter you have pressed the <o><p>  
buttons or turned the <7> dial to choose  
a tab initially, you can switch between  
tabs by pressing the <q><r> buttons.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
5 Finish the setup process.  
zzPress the <n> button to return to the  
screen displayed before you pressed the  
<n> button in step 1.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default  
Index  
settings (=157).  
25  
     
Cover  
Deleting Characters  
On-Screen Keyboard  
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (=40),  
Wi-Fi connections (=133), and so on. Note that the length and type of  
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.  
Before Use  
zzTo delete the previous character,  
choose [ ] and press the <m> button.  
Alternatively, press the <a> button.  
zzHolding down the <a> button will delete  
five characters at a time.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Number of Available Characters  
Entering Characters  
Advanced Guide  
Confirming Input and Returning to  
the Previous Screen  
zzPress the <n> button.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose a character,  
and then press the <m> button to enter it.  
zzThe amount of information you can enter  
varies depending on the function you are  
using.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Moving the Cursor  
zzChoose [ ] or [ ] and press the <m>  
button. Alternatively, turn the <7> dial.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Entering Line Breaks  
zzChoose [  
] and press the <m> button.  
Setting Menu  
Switching Input Modes  
zzTo switch to numbers or symbols, choose  
Accessories  
9
10  
[
] and press the <m> button.  
Appendix  
zzTo switch between uppercase and  
lowercase letters, choose [ ] and press  
the <m> button.  
Index  
zzAvailable input modes vary depending on  
the function you are using.  
26  
   
Cover  
Indicator Display  
Clock  
You can check the current time.  
Before Use  
The indicator of the camera (=3, 4) lights up or blinks depending  
Common Camera  
Operations  
on the camera status.  
zzPress and hold the <m> button.  
zzThe current time appears.  
zzIf you hold the camera vertically while  
using the clock function, it will switch  
to vertical display. Press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial to change  
the display color.  
Indicator  
Status  
Basic Guide  
Indicator  
Color  
Camera Status  
Advanced Guide  
Power Lamp  
Green  
On  
Camera on  
On  
Ready to shoot (when the flash is deactivated)  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Recording/reading/transmitting images, shooting  
long exposures (=92, 93), distance  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Green  
Blinking warning (=185), cannot focus (when the  
flash is deactivated) (=185), or connecting/  
transmitting via Wi-Fi  
Indicator  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <m> button again to cancel  
the clock display.  
On  
Ready to shoot (when the flash is activated)  
P Mode  
Orange  
Distance warning (=185), or cannot focus  
(when the flash is activated) (=185)  
Blinking  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
When the camera is off, press and hold the <m> button, then press the power  
Playback Mode  
When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the  
memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may  
corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.  
button to display the clock.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
27  
 
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
2
Basic Guide  
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode  
Advanced Guide  
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Shooting with Camera-Determined  
Settings............................................................ 29  
Shooting (Smart Auto)...........................................29  
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode...............................31  
Scene Icons ..........................................................33  
Image Stabilization Icons ......................................34  
On-Screen Frames................................................35  
Using Face ID ................................................... 39 Helpful Shooting Features .............................. 47  
Registering Face ID Information ...........................39  
Shooting................................................................41  
Checking and Editing Registered Information.......42  
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level.....................47  
Magnifying the Area in Focus................................47  
Checking for Closed Eyes.....................................48  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Image Customization Features....................... 44 Customizing Camera Operation ..................... 48  
Setting Menu  
Changing the Aspect Ratio....................................44  
Changing Image Resolution (Size) .......................45  
Red-Eye Correction...............................................45  
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury  
Lamps ...................................................................46  
Changing Movie Image Quality.............................46  
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam..........................48  
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ..........49  
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots......49  
Common, Convenient Features...................... 35  
Accessories  
9
10  
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .....35  
Using the Self-Timer..............................................36  
Adding a Date Stamp............................................38  
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF).....38  
Appendix  
Index  
28  
 
Cover  
Shooting with Camera-Determined  
Settings  
3 Compose the shot.  
Before Use  
zzTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move  
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),  
and to zoom away from the subject, move  
it toward <j> (wide angle). (A zoom bar  
showing the zoom position is displayed.)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,  
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.  
Basic Guide  
Zoom Bar  
Still Images  
Movies  
Advanced Guide  
Shooting (Smart Auto)  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Focus Range (approx.)  
zzPress the power button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzThe startup screen is displayed.  
4 Shoot.  
P Mode  
Shooting Still Images  
Focus.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Enter [  
] mode.  
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The  
camera beeps twice after focusing, and  
AF frames are displayed to indicate  
image areas in focus.  
zzSet the mode dial to [  
].  
Playback Mode  
zzAim the camera at the subject. The  
camera will make a slight clicking noise  
as it determines the scene.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzSeveral AF frames are displayed when  
multiple areas are in focus.  
zzIcons representing the scene and image  
stabilization mode are displayed in the  
upper left of the screen (=33, 34).  
zzFrames displayed around any detected  
subjects indicate that they are in focus.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
zzIf [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,  
move the < > switch to raise the flash.  
It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not  
to use the flash, push it down with your  
finger, into the camera.  
29  
           
Cover  
Shoot.  
Resize the subject and  
recompose the shot as needed.  
zzTo resize the subject, repeat the  
operations in step 3 (=29).  
However, note that the sound of camera  
operations will be recorded.  
Before Use  
zzPress the shutter button all the way  
down.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound  
is played, and in low-light conditions  
when you have raised the flash, it fires  
automatically.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzWhen you recompose shots, the  
focus, brightness, and colors will be  
automatically adjusted.  
zzKeep the camera still until the shutter  
sound ends.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzAfter displaying your shot, the camera will  
revert to the shooting screen.  
Finish shooting.  
zzPress the movie button again to stop  
shooting. The camera beeps twice as  
recording stops.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Shooting Movies  
Start shooting.  
zzPress the movie button. The camera  
beeps once as recording begins, and  
P Mode  
zzRecording will stop automatically when  
the memory card becomes full.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed  
Elapsed Time  
Playback Mode  
The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically  
attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi-  
area White Balance).  
time.  
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas  
will not be recorded.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzFrames displayed around any detected  
faces indicate that they are in focus.  
zzOnce recording begins, take your finger  
off the movie button.  
Appendix  
Index  
30  
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [  
digest movies are recorded for each shot.  
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image  
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or  
operating the camera in other ways.  
] mode, because  
Before Use  
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode  
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The  
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are  
later combined in a digest movie.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Enter [ ] mode.  
Digest movie quality is [  
] and cannot be changed.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”  
(=29) and choose [ ].  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Some camera sounds will be muted. Sounds are not played when you press  
the shutter button halfway or trigger the self-timer (=150).  
Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording  
time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds.  
2 Compose the shot.  
P Mode  
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart  
Auto)” (=29) to compose the shot and  
focus.  
- The digest movie is protected (=111).  
- Daylight saving time (=15) or time zone (=151) settings are changed.  
- A new folder is created (=155).  
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.  
If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in  
advance. Press the <n> button, and on the [4] tab, set [Digest Type] to  
[No Stills] (=25).  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzFor more impressive digest movies,  
aim the camera at subjects about four  
seconds before shooting still images.  
3 Shoot.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Individual chapters can be edited (=123).  
Setting Menu  
zzFollow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”  
(=29) to shoot a still image.  
Accessories  
Digest Movie Playback  
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify the  
date of the digest movie to play (=104).  
9
10  
zzThe camera records both a still image  
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with  
the still image and a shutter sound, forms  
a single chapter in the digest movie.  
Appendix  
Index  
31  
     
Cover  
Before Use  
Still Images/Movies  
Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
To activate the screen when the camera is on but the screen is  
Keep your fingers away from the  
microphone while shooting movies.  
Blocking the microphone may prevent  
audio from being recorded or may  
cause the recording to sound muffled.  
Microphone  
blank in [  
] mode, press the <p> button.  
Basic Guide  
If the camera is turned on while the <p> button is held down, the  
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the  
<n> button and choose [Mute] on the [3] tab, and then press  
the <q><r> buttons to choose [Off].  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when  
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be  
recorded.  
Once movie recording begins, a smaller image display area is  
shown, with the subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting  
distortion such as rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the  
same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization  
setting (=89).  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Still Images  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred  
by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take  
other measures to keep it still.  
If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the  
subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (=205).  
The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when  
you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing  
To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be  
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.  
A blinking [h] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates  
that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging.  
Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press  
the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press  
it again.  
The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies  
(Sleeping) icons (=33) are displayed.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Audio is recorded in stereo.  
Playback Mode  
Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced.  
However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when  
there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, press the <n> button,  
choose [Wind Filter] on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off] (=25).  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is  
displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness,  
and colors used.  
You can change how long images are displayed after shots (=49).  
32  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue, and the  
Before Use  
background color of [ ] is orange.  
Scene Icons  
When shooting movies, only People, Other Subjects, and At Close Range icons will  
be displayed.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
In [ ] and [  
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera  
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are  
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.  
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (=34).  
When shooting in [ ] mode, only People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and At  
Close Range icons will be displayed.  
Basic Guide  
When shooting with the self-timer, People (In Motion), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies  
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), Children, Other Subjects (In Motion) icons will not be  
displayed.  
Advanced Guide  
Background  
Normal Backlit  
Dark*  
Sunsets Spotlights  
Camera Basics  
Subject  
People  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When the drive mode is set to [ ] (=34), and when [Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to  
[On] and scenes are automatically corrected (=46), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies  
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will not be displayed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
In Motion  
Shadows on Face  
Smiling  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
If the flash is set to [ ], the Backlit icons for Smiling and Children will not be  
displayed.  
P Mode  
Babies, Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will be displayed  
when [Face ID] is set to [On], and the face of a registered baby (under two years old)  
or child (from two to twelve years old) is detected (=39). Confirm beforehand that  
the date and time are correct (=14).  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Sleeping  
Babies  
Playback Mode  
Smiling  
Try shooting in [G] mode (=67) if the scene icon does not match  
actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your  
expected effect, color, or brightness.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Sleeping  
Children (In Motion)  
Other Subjects  
In Motion  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
At Close Range  
* Tripod Used  
Index  
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,  
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.  
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,  
and gray for all other backgrounds.  
33  
 
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
Continuous Shooting Scenes  
Image Stabilization Icons  
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically  
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [  
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,  
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway  
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following  
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous  
images: [ ], [ ], or [W].  
Common Camera  
Operations  
]
Basic Guide  
and [  
] modes.  
Image stabilization for movies,  
reducing strong camera shake,  
Advanced Guide  
Image stabilization for still  
images  
: Consecutive images are captured, and the camera  
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save  
as when shooting while walking  
(Dynamic IS)  
Camera Basics  
Smiling (including Babies)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
the image determined to be the best.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Image stabilization for slow  
camera shake, such as when  
shooting movies at telephoto  
(Powered IS)  
: Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by  
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera  
shake and image noise.  
The AF assist beam will not light up, the flash will not  
fire, and the shutter sound will not be played.  
Image stabilization for still  
images when panning*  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Sleeping (including Babies)  
Children  
P Mode  
No image stabilization, because  
the camera is mounted on  
a tripod or held still by other  
means  
Image stabilization for macro  
shots (Hybrid IS)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
W: So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children  
who move around, the camera will capture three  
consecutive images for each shot.  
Playback Mode  
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow  
subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera  
shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving  
vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images  
may not look as expected.  
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.  
Setting Menu  
To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=89). In this case, an  
IS icon is not displayed.  
Accessories  
9
10  
When you want to shoot single images only, press the <m> button, choose  
In [ ] mode, no [  
] icon is displayed.  
[
] in the menu, and then select [ ].  
Appendix  
Index  
34  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Common, Convenient Features  
Before Use  
On-Screen Frames  
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects  
subjects you are aiming the camera at.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
In [  
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)  
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,  
use digital zoom for up to about 20x enlargement.  
Basic Guide  
A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)  
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are  
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects  
within a certain range to keep them in focus.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Move the zoom lever toward  
<i>.  
zzHold the lever until zooming stops.  
zzZooming stops at the largest possible  
zoom factor (before the image becomes  
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated  
on the screen.  
However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame  
will remain on the screen.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera  
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and  
image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Try shooting in [G] mode (=67) if no frames are displayed, if  
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are  
displayed on the background or similar areas.  
Zoom Factor  
2 Move the zoom lever toward  
Playback Mode  
<i> again.  
zzThe camera zooms in even closer on the  
subject.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
35  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates  
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending  
on the zoom range.  
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear  
grainy.  
Before Use  
Using the Self-Timer  
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed  
shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter  
button.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably  
grainy (ZoomPlus).  
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.  
Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution  
settings (=45), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by  
following step 1.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [  
]
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
in the menu, and then choose the []]  
option (=24).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, []] is  
displayed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm  
film equivalent).  
28 – 560 mm (28 – 140 mm with optical zoom alone)  
To deactivate digital zoom, press the <n> button, choose [Digital Zoom]  
on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off].  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
2 Shoot.  
zzFor Still Images: Press the shutter button  
halfway to focus on the subject, and then  
press it all the way down.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzFor Movies: Press the movie button.  
Appendix  
Index  
36  
       
Cover  
zzOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp  
will blink and the camera will play a self-  
timer sound.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Customizing the Self-Timer  
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).  
zzTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking  
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will  
remain lit in case the flash fires.)  
zzTo cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
<n> button.  
Basic Guide  
1 Choose [$].  
Advanced Guide  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(=36), choose [$] and press the  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
<
> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzTo restore the original setting, choose  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose the [Delay]  
time, either press the <q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose the number  
of [Shots], and then press the <m>  
button.  
[
] in step 1.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Movies  
P Mode  
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have  
pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing  
the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [$] is  
displayed.  
Playback Mode  
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(=36) to shoot.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(=36) and choose [[].  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [[] is  
displayed.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay  
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”  
(=36) to shoot.  
Appendix  
When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are  
determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the  
flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop  
automatically when the memory card becomes full.  
Index  
When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the  
shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will  
remain lit in case the flash fires.)  
37  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows.  
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may  
cause it to be printed twice.  
Before Use  
Adding a Date Stamp  
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner.  
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm  
beforehand that the date and time are correct (=14).  
Common Camera  
Operations  
- Print using printer functions (=176)  
- Use camera DPOF print settings (=180) to print  
- Use the software downloaded from the Canon website to print (=173)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Configure the setting.  
Still Images  
Movies  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Date  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)  
In [AUTO] mode, shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.  
Stamp  
] on the [4] tab, and then  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
choose the desired option (=25).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Specify Tracking AF.  
zzPress the <o> button.  
zz[ ] is displayed in the center of the  
screen.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
2 Choose a subject to focus on.  
zzAim the camera so that [ ] is on the  
desired subject, and then press the  
shutter button halfway.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
2 Shoot.  
Setting Menu  
zzAs you take shots, the camera adds the  
shooting date or time to the lower-right  
corner of images.  
zzA blue frame is displayed, and the  
camera will keep the subject in focus and  
image brightness adjusted (Servo AF).  
3 Shoot.  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzTo restore the original setting, choose  
[Off] in step 1.  
Appendix  
Index  
zzPress the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot.  
Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.  
zzPress the <o> button to cancel Tracking AF.  
Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly,  
or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely.  
38  
     
Cover  
Registering Face ID Information  
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12  
people to use with Face ID.  
Using Face ID  
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s  
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
shooting. In [  
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based  
Basic Guide  
on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting.  
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person  
among a large number of images (=106).  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Face  
ID Settings] on the [4] tab, and then  
press the <m> button (=25).  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Personal Information  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID,  
and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera.  
Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be  
recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful  
when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting  
images online where many others can view them.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Add to Registry],  
and then press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after  
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names,  
and birthdays) from the camera (=44).  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Add a New Face],  
and then press the <m> button.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
39  
         
Cover  
2 Register face information.  
zzAim the camera so that the face of the  
person you want to register is inside the  
gray frame at the center of the screen.  
zzA white frame on the person’s face  
indicates that the face is recognized.  
Make sure a white frame is displayed on  
the face, and then shoot.  
zzTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]  
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press  
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>  
dial), and then press the <m> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
option.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to specify the date.  
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzIf the face is not recognized, you cannot  
register face information.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
4 Save the settings.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzAfter [Register?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Save], and then  
press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
zzAfter a message is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to  
choose [Yes], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzThe [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
3 Register the person’s name and  
birthday.  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
keyboard, and then enter the name  
(=26).  
5 Continue registering face  
information.  
zzTo register up to 4 more points of face  
information (expressions or angles),  
repeat step 2.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzRegistered faces are more easily  
recognized if you add a variety of face  
information. In addition to a head-on  
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot  
when smiling, and shots inside and  
outside.  
Index  
40  
   
Cover  
Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or  
scene differs drastically from the registered face information.  
If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered  
information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will  
allow for easier detection of registered faces.  
If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue  
shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during  
playback (=108).  
Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow, you should  
update their face info regularly (=43).  
When the screen is set to off (=23), names for detected faces are not  
displayed, but they will be recorded with images.  
Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the [Shooting Info]  
check box in [Custom Display] (=95) on the [4] tab so that the names are  
not displayed.  
The flash will not fire when following step 2.  
If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
(=33) will not be displayed in [  
] mode.  
Basic Guide  
You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not  
filled all 5 face info slots (=43).  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person  
as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that  
person when shooting.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzWhen you point the camera toward a  
subject, the names of up to 3 registered  
people will be displayed when they are  
detected.  
If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID  
Settings] on the [4] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].  
You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple  
information display) (=103).  
In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, but they will be  
recorded in still images.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
zzShoot.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzDisplayed names will be recorded in still  
images. Even if people are detected, but  
their names are not displayed, the names  
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the  
image.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as  
the registered person if they share similar facial features.  
Index  
41  
Cover  
3 Check or edit the information as  
needed.  
Checking and Editing Registered Information  
Before Use  
zzTo check a name or birthday, access  
the [Edit Profile] screen by pressing the  
<o><p> buttons or turning the <7>  
dial and then pressing the <m> button.  
On the screen displayed, you can edit  
names or birthdays as described in step  
3 of “Registering Face ID Information”  
(=40).  
zzTo check face information, choose [Face  
Info List] (either press the <o><p>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then  
press the <m> button. Press the <m>  
button on the screen displayed, choose  
face information to erase by pressing the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons or turning  
the <7> dial, and then the <m> button.  
After [Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK]  
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info]  
Common Camera  
Operations  
screen.  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” (=39), choose [Check/  
Edit Info] and press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Choose a person to check or  
edit.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose the person to  
check or edit, and then press the <m>  
button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in  
previously shot images will remain the same.  
Appendix  
Index  
You can use the software to edit registered names. Some characters entered  
with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded  
in images.  
42  
 
Cover  
3 Choose the face info to  
overwrite.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose the face info  
to overwrite, and then press the <m>  
button.  
Overwriting and Adding Face Information  
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should  
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as  
their faces change quickly as they grow.  
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been  
filled.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Access the [Add Face Info]  
screen.  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” (=39), choose [Add Face  
Info] and press the <m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 Register face information.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” (=40) to shoot, and then  
register the new face information.  
zzRegistered faces are more easily  
recognized if you add a variety of face  
information. In addition to a head-on  
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot  
when smiling, and shots inside and  
outside.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Choose the name of the person  
whose face info you want to  
overwrite.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose the name  
of a person whose face info you want  
to overwrite, and then press the <m>  
button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled. Follow the  
steps above to overwrite face information.  
You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least  
one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead  
of overwriting face info, first erase unwanted existing info (=42), and then  
register new face information (=39) as needed.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzIf five items of face info have already  
been registered, a message will be  
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzIf less than five items of face info are  
registered, go to step 4 to add face  
information.  
Appendix  
Index  
43  
   
Cover  
Image Customization Features  
Before Use  
Erasing Registered Information  
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face  
ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased.  
Still Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Changing the Aspect Ratio  
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.  
Basic Guide  
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.  
zzFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID  
Information” (=39) and choose [Erase  
Info].  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, the screen  
aspect ratio will be updated.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [ ].  
2 Choose the name of the person  
whose info you want to erase.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose the name  
of a person to erase, and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.  
Setting Menu  
Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or  
postcard sizes.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standard-  
definition televisions or similar display devices, or for printing images at 3.5 x  
5-inch or A-series sizes.  
If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to  
display their name (=105), overwrite their info (=108), or  
search images for them (=107).  
Appendix  
Index  
Square aspect ratio.  
Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.  
You can also erase names in image information (=109).  
Not available in [ ] mode.  
44  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Changing Image Resolution (Size)  
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on  
how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see  
Red-Eye Correction  
Red-eye that occurs in flash photography can be automatically corrected as  
Common Camera  
Operations  
follows.  
Basic Guide  
1 Access the [Built-in Flash  
Settings] screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash  
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press  
the <m> button (=25).  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [ ].  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then  
choose [On] (=25).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [R] is  
displayed.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper  
Size (for 4:3 Images)  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)  
9
10  
zz[ ]: For e-mailing images.  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
A3 – A5 (11.7 x  
16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)  
Appendix  
Index  
5 x 7 in.  
Postcard  
3.5 x 5 in.  
Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes  
(if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for  
example).  
Not available in [ ] mode.  
45  
     
Cover  
Movies  
You can also correct existing images (=121).  
Before Use  
Changing Movie Image Quality  
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum  
movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,  
You can also access the screen in step 2 by holding down the <r> button for  
at least one second.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the  
<r> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.  
Basic Guide  
Still Images  
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from  
Mercury Lamps  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [  
in the menu, and choose the desired  
option (=24).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
]
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
In [  
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes  
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This  
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-  
area White Balance.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [  
].  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Hg  
Lamp Corr.] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [On] (=25).  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Image  
Quality  
Resolution  
1920 x 1080*  
Frame Rate  
Details  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
Setting Menu  
60 fps  
For shooting in Full HD  
] enables movies  
Accessories  
[
9
10  
with smoother motion  
1920 x 1080*  
1280 x 720  
640 x 480  
30 fps  
30 fps  
30 fps  
Appendix  
For shooting in HD  
Index  
For shooting in standard  
definition  
After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set  
[Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by  
mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.  
* Fine Detail Movie Processing (This function quickly processes a large amount of  
information, making it possible to record even finer details in movies.)  
In [  
], [  
], and [  
] modes, black bars displayed on the top and  
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results.  
bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded.  
46  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Helpful Shooting Features  
Before Use  
Magnifying the Area in Focus  
Still Images  
Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will  
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.  
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level  
Basic Guide  
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera is  
level from front to back and left to right.  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF-  
Point Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [On] (=25).  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Display the electronic level.  
zzPress the <p> button several times to  
display the electronic level.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
2 Straighten the camera.  
zzIf the camera is tilted, move it so that the  
red line changes to green.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
2 Check the focus.  
zzPress the shutter button halfway. The  
face detected as the main subject is now  
magnified.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Back or  
Forward  
Left or Right  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzTo restore the original setting, choose  
[Off] in step 1.  
If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the <n> button, and  
on the [4] tab, choose [Custom Display]. Add a [ ] to [ ] or [ ] to choose  
the electronic level.  
The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.  
If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be  
updated automatically to match the camera orientation.  
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the  
camera (=155).  
Appendix  
The area in focus will not be magnified when you press the shutter  
button halfway if a face was not detected, if the person is too close  
to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the  
camera detects subject movement.  
Index  
47  
     
Cover  
Customizing Camera Operation  
The display will not magnify when using the digital zoom (=35), Tracking  
AF (=82), or when using a TV as a display (=163).  
Not available in [ ] mode.  
Before Use  
Customize shooting functions on the MENU [4] tab as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Still Images  
Checking for Closed Eyes  
] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed  
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam  
Advanced Guide  
[
their eyes.  
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when  
you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Blink  
Detection] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [On] (=25).  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF-  
assist Beam] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [Off] (=25).  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [On].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
2 Shoot.  
Accessories  
zz[ ] flashes when the camera detects a  
person whose eyes are closed.  
zzTo restore the original setting, choose  
[Off] in step 1.  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
When you have specified multiple shots in [$] mode, this function is only  
available for the final shot.  
A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have  
selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (=49).  
This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [ ] mode  
(=76).  
48  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp  
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-  
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots  
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is  
displayed immediately after shooting.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.  
Basic Guide  
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots  
1 Access the [Built-in Flash  
Settings] screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash  
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press  
the <m> button (=25).  
Advanced Guide  
1 Access the [Review image after  
shooting] screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Review image after shooting] on the  
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button  
(=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then  
choose [Off] (=25).  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [On].  
P Mode  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial to choose [Display Time].  
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose the  
desired option.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Quick].  
Setting Menu  
Quick  
Displays images only until you can shoot again.  
Accessories  
9
10  
2 sec., 4 sec., Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed,  
Appendix  
8 sec.  
Hold  
Off  
you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again.  
Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.  
No image display after shots.  
Index  
49  
       
Cover  
Before Use  
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots  
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],  
Basic Guide  
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold]  
(=49).  
Advanced Guide  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Display Info]. Press  
the <q><r> buttons to choose the  
desired option.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzTo restore the original setting, repeat this  
process but choose [Off].  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Off  
Displays only the image.  
Displays shooting details (=192).  
Detailed  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
When [Display Time] (=49) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to  
[Off] and cannot be changed.  
By pressing the <p> button while an image is displayed after shooting, you  
can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are  
not changed. You can also delete the image, by pressing the <a> button.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
50  
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
3
Basic Guide  
Other Shooting Modes  
Advanced Guide  
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or  
captured using special functions  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Shots Resembling Miniature Models  
(Miniature Effect)...................................................57  
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect  
(Toy Camera Effect) ..............................................58  
Making Subjects Stand Out  
(Background Defocus) ..........................................58  
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect .........................59  
Shooting in Monochrome ......................................59  
Specific Scenes................................................ 52  
Special Modes for Other Purposes ................ 60  
Auto Shooting after Face Detection  
(Smart Shutter)......................................................60  
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)..................................62  
Shooting Various Movies ................................ 65  
Playback Mode  
Image Effects (Creative Filters) ...................... 54  
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes  
(High Dynamic Range)..........................................55  
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)................56  
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode ..............................65  
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies ....................66  
(Fish-Eye Effect) ...................................................56  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
51  
   
Cover  
Specific Scenes  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Shoot evening scenes without  
using a tripod (Handheld  
NightScene)  
zzBeautiful shots of evening scenes or  
portraits with evening scenery in the  
background, without the need to hold the  
camera very still (as with a tripod).  
zzA single image is created by combining  
consecutive shots, reducing camera  
shake and image noise.  
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will  
Common Camera  
Operations  
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.  
Basic Guide  
1 Enter [K] mode.  
zzSet the mode dial to [K].  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Choose a shooting mode.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [I] in the  
menu, and then choose a shooting mode  
(=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Movies  
P Mode  
SShoot underwater (Underwater)  
zzNatural-colored shots of sea life and  
underwater scenery, when you use an  
optional waterproof case (=162).  
zzThis mode can correct white balance and  
match the effect of using a commercially  
available color-compensating filter  
(=74).  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Shoot.  
Playback Mode  
Still Images  
Movies  
Wi-Fi Functions  
IShoot portraits (Portrait)  
zzTake shots of people with a softening  
effect.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Still Images  
Movies  
Appendix  
PShoot with snowy backgrounds  
(Snow)  
Index  
zzBright, natural-colored shots of people  
against snowy backgrounds.  
52  
           
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Before Use  
tShoot fireworks (Fireworks)  
zzVivid shots of fireworks.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range  
If focusing is difficult in [S] mode (=52) with a focus range of [ ],  
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal  
underwater shots.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=52) and choose [S].  
zzPress the <q> button, choose the desired  
focus range (either press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then  
press the <m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.  
In [ ] and [S] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO  
speed (=70) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.  
Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it  
steady while shooting.  
In [ ] mode, excessive camera shake or certain shooting  
conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.  
In [t] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures  
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should  
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure  
the camera (=89).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Shoot.  
Focusing Range  
Description  
Playback Mode  
Underwater  
Macro  
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for even closer  
shots.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting opportunities  
when shooting subjects some distance away. Especially effective  
for moving subjects.  
When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [  
] mode instead  
Setting Menu  
Quick  
8
of [ ] mode will give better results (=29).  
In [t] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter  
button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
range.  
Index  
53  
       
Cover  
Image Effects (Creative Filters)  
Before Use  
In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.  
In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear  
grainy at some resolutions (=45).  
In [8] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In this  
case, try setting the focus range to [ ].  
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
1 Enter [ ] mode.  
Basic Guide  
zzSet the mode dial to [ ].  
Advanced Guide  
[  
] and [8] are not available in [Tracking AF] AF frame mode (=38).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Choose a shooting mode.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and then choose a shooting  
mode (=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Shoot.  
Playback Mode  
Still Images  
Movies  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Shoot in vivid colors  
(Super Vivid)  
zzShots in rich, vivid colors.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
54  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent  
Before Use  
you from obtaining the desired results.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Posterized shots (Poster Effect)  
zzShots that resemble an old poster or  
illustration.  
If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the camera on  
a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set  
[IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera  
(=89).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.  
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes  
and combines the images.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure  
you obtain the desired results.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Adding Artistic Effects  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes  
(High Dynamic Range)  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
P Mode  
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
[
].  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels  
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal  
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-out  
highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tends to occur in high-contrast  
shots.  
zzPress the < > button, choose an effect  
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
Playback Mode  
the <7> dial), and then press the <  
>
Wi-Fi Functions  
button again.  
Natural  
Images are natural and organic.  
Setting Menu  
Art Standard  
Art Vivid  
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.  
Images resemble vivid illustrations.  
1 Choose [ ].  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
Art Bold  
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.  
Appendix  
[
].  
Art Embossed  
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and dark ambiance.  
Index  
2 Shoot.  
zzHold the camera steady as you shoot.  
When you press the shutter button all  
the way down, the camera will take three  
shots and combine them.  
55  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)  
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old  
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect  
(Fish-Eye Effect)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
photographs. Choose from five effect levels.  
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.  
Basic Guide  
1 Choose [ ].  
1 Choose [ ].  
Advanced Guide  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
[
].  
[
].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Choose an effect level.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose an effect  
level.  
2 Choose an effect level.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose an effect  
level.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Shoot.  
3 Shoot.  
Playback Mode  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired  
Wi-Fi Functions  
results.  
results.  
Setting Menu  
Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not  
shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect (=102).  
The image aging effect is not shown in movies.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
56  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Shots Resembling Miniature Models  
(Miniature Effect)  
Movies  
Before Use  
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time  
(for One-Minute Clips)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Speed  
Playback Time  
Approx. 12 sec.  
Approx. 6 sec.  
Approx. 3 sec.  
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and  
below your selected area.  
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by  
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and  
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is  
not recorded.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the  
zoom before shooting.  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired  
results.  
1 Choose [ ].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
P Mode  
[
].  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the <q><r> buttons  
in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the <o><p>  
buttons.  
Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame.  
Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at an aspect  
ratio of [ ] (=44). These quality settings cannot be changed.  
zzA white frame is displayed, indicating the  
image area that will not be blurred.  
Playback Mode  
2 Choose the area to keep in focus.  
zzPress the < > button.  
zzMove the zoom lever to resize the frame,  
and turn the <7> dial to move it.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
3 For movies, choose the movie  
playback speed.  
Index  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose the speed.  
4 Return to the shooting screen  
and shoot.  
zzPress the < > button to return to the  
shooting screen, and then shoot.  
57  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect  
(Toy Camera Effect)  
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting  
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.  
Making Subjects Stand Out  
(Background Defocus)  
Two consecutive images are captured each time you shoot and processed  
into a single image, so that the subject stands out against a blurred  
background.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Choose [ ].  
Camera Basics  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [ ].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
[
].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
[
].  
2 Choose a color tone.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose a color  
tone.  
2 Shoot.  
P Mode  
zzHold the camera steady as you shoot.  
When you press the shutter button all the  
way down, the camera will shoot twice  
and process the images.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
Playback Mode  
3 Shoot.  
zzA blinking [ ] icon indicates that the  
images could not be processed.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.  
Warm  
Cool  
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].  
Setting Menu  
Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent  
you from obtaining the desired results.  
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].  
Accessories  
9
10  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired  
Appendix  
For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the subject, and  
ensure ample distance between the subject and background.  
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes  
the images.  
results.  
Index  
To adjust the effect level, turn the <z> dial.  
58  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect  
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were  
Shooting in Monochrome  
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.  
Basic Guide  
1 Choose [ ].  
1 Choose [ ].  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
Advanced Guide  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects  
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
(Creative Filters)” (=54) and choose  
Camera Basics  
[
].  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[
].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Choose a color tone.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose a color  
tone.  
2 Choose an effect level.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose an effect  
level.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
P Mode  
zzA preview is shown of how your shot will  
look with the effect applied.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Shoot.  
3 Shoot.  
B/W  
Black and white shots.  
Playback Mode  
Sepia  
Blue  
Sepia tone shots.  
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired  
results.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Blue and white shots.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
59  
     
Cover  
Special Modes for Other Purposes  
You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.  
The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and  
open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing  
Auto Shooting after Face Detection  
(Smart Shutter)  
[
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (=48) is only available for the final shot.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection  
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you  
pressing the shutter button.  
Camera Basics  
Using the Wink Self-Timer  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down.  
The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Choose [ ].  
1 Choose [ ].  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=52) and choose [ ], and then  
press the < > button.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=52) and choose [ ], and then  
press the < > button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the < > button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the < > button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzThe camera now enters shooting standby  
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is  
displayed.  
2 Compose the shot and press  
the shutter button halfway.  
zzMake sure a green frame is displayed  
around the face of the person who will  
wink.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
2 Aim the camera at a person.  
zzEach time the camera detects a smile, it  
will shoot after the lamp lights up.  
zzTo pause smile detection, press the <p>  
button. Press the <p> button again to  
resume detection.  
Appendix  
3 Press the shutter button all the  
way down.  
zzThe camera now enters shooting standby  
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is  
displayed.  
Index  
Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will  
continue shooting each time a smile is detected.  
zzThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound  
is played.  
60  
 
Cover  
2 Compose the shot and press  
the shutter button halfway.  
zzMake sure a green frame is displayed  
around the face you focus on and white  
frames around other faces.  
4 Face the camera and wink.  
zzThe camera will shoot about two seconds  
after detecting a wink by the person  
whose face is inside the frame.  
zzTo cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
<n> button.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
3 Press the shutter button all the  
way down.  
Advanced Guide  
zzThe camera now enters shooting standby  
mode, and [Look straight at camera to  
start count down] is displayed.  
zzThe lamp blinks and the self-timer sound  
is played.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses.  
Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.  
If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.  
To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
[
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (=48) is only available for the final shot.  
4 Join the subjects in the  
shooting area and look at the  
camera.  
zzAfter the camera detects a new face, the  
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will  
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp  
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,  
the camera will shoot.  
P Mode  
If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks.  
Still Images  
Playback Mode  
Using the Face Self-Timer  
Wi-Fi Functions  
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of  
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area  
(=82). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar  
shots.  
Setting Menu  
zzTo cancel shooting after you have  
triggered the self-timer, press the  
<n> button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
1 Choose [ ].  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=52) and choose [ ], and then  
press the < > button.  
Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area,  
the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.  
To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing  
Index  
[
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (=48) is only available for the final shot.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the < > button.  
61  
   
Cover  
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)  
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes  
and combines the images.  
To disable image processing that makes stars more prominent, choose MENU  
► [4] tab ► [Star Emphasis] ► [Off].  
Set [Night Display] to [On] (=90) in this mode.  
Switch to manual focus mode (=78) to more accurately specify the focal  
position before shooting.  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies  
(Star Nightscape)  
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in the  
image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a  
commercially available color-compensating filter (=74).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [ ].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Still Images  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=52) and choose [ ], and then  
press the < > button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)  
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in a  
single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots, the  
camera shoots continuously. Each shooting session lasts up to about two  
hours. Check the battery level in advance.  
P Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Secure the camera.  
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take  
other measures to keep it still and  
prevent camera shake.  
Playback Mode  
1 Choose [ ].  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=52) and choose [ ], and then  
press the < > button.  
Setting Menu  
3 Shoot.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
2 Specify the duration of the  
Index  
shooting session.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose the  
shooting duration.  
Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.  
3 Secure the camera.  
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take  
other measures to keep it still.  
62  
     
Cover  
4 Shoot.  
Movies  
Before Use  
zzPress the shutter button all the way  
down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and  
then shooting begins.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Shooting Movies of Star Movement  
(Star Time-Lapse Movie)  
Basic Guide  
Still images are captured continuously over a specified duration and  
combined to create a movie. The camera shoots once each minute, and no  
sound is recorded.  
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.  
zzTo cancel shooting, press the shutter  
button all the way down again.  
Advanced Guide  
Stars move quickly during playback, so you can view their movement  
in a short time. Each shooting session lasts up to about two hours, and  
many shots are taken. Check the battery level and memory card space in  
advance.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a  
composite image created from the images up to that point is saved.  
Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Choose [ ].  
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes  
and combines the images.  
Set [Night Display] to [On] (=90) in this mode.  
Switch to manual focus mode (=78) to more accurately specify the focal  
position before shooting.  
This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a  
commercially available color-compensating filter (=74).  
P Mode  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”  
(=52) and choose [ ], and then  
press the < > button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
2 Specify the duration of the  
shooting session.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to choose the  
shooting duration.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
3 Secure the camera.  
zzMount the camera on a tripod or take  
other measures to keep it still.  
Index  
63  
   
Cover  
4 Check the brightness.  
zzPress the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot a single still image.  
If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,  
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that point  
is saved.  
Maximum available shooting duration varies depending on free  
space on the memory card.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzSwitch to Playback mode (=101) and  
check image brightness.  
Basic Guide  
Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.  
zzTo adjust brightness, turn the exposure  
compensation dial and change the  
exposure level. Check brightness again  
by taking another shot.  
Advanced Guide  
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes  
the images.  
To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose MENU ►  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
[4] tab ► [Save  
Stills] ► [On]. Note that these individual images are  
managed as a single group, and during playback, only the first image is  
5 Shoot.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the movie button. [Busy] is  
displayed briefly, and then shooting  
begins.  
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [  
in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (=114), all  
images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.  
Set [Night Display] to [On] (=90) in this mode.  
] is displayed  
P Mode  
zzThe indicator blinks throughout the  
shooting session.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Switch to manual focus mode (=78) to more accurately specify the focal  
position before shooting.  
This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a  
commercially available color-compensating filter (=74).  
zzDo not disturb the camera while shooting.  
zzTo cancel shooting, press the movie  
button again.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzThe camera operates in Eco mode  
(=152) while shooting.  
Setting Menu  
Estimated Shooting and Playback Times  
Session Time  
Accessories  
9
10  
Playback Time  
Appendix  
[120']  
[90']  
[60']  
Approx. 8 sec.  
Approx. 6 sec.  
Approx. 4 sec.  
Index  
64  
 
Cover  
Movies  
Movies  
Before Use  
Shooting Various Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting  
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop  
increments within a range of –3 to +3.  
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode  
Basic Guide  
1 Enter [E] mode.  
Advanced Guide  
zzSet the mode dial to [E].  
1 Lock the exposure.  
zzPress the < > button to lock the  
exposure. The exposure shift bar is  
displayed.  
zzBlack bars are displayed on the top and  
bottom edges of the screen, and the  
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas  
will not be recorded.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzTo unlock the exposure, press the <  
button again.  
>
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the settings to suit  
the movie (=193 201).  
2 Adjust the exposure.  
P Mode  
zzTurn the <7> dial to adjust the exposure,  
3 Shoot.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
as you watch the screen.  
zzPress the movie button.  
zzTo stop movie recording, press the movie  
button again.  
3 Shoot (=65).  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
65  
         
Cover  
Movies  
Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the  
zoom lever.  
Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the  
movie button.  
Before Use  
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies  
You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note  
that sound is not recorded.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
1 Choose [ ].  
When you play the movie (=102), it will be played back in slow motion.  
You can change the playback speed of movies by using the software  
(=173).  
Advanced Guide  
zzSet the mode dial to [E].  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [E]  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
in the menu, and then choose [  
(=24).  
]
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a frame rate.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [  
] in  
the menu, and choose the desired frame  
P Mode  
rate (=24).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
3 Shoot (=65).  
zzA bar showing the elapsed time is  
displayed. Maximum clip length is approx.  
30 sec.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
Playback Time (For a 30-  
Frame Rate  
Image Quality  
sec. Clip)  
Approx. 4 min.  
Approx. 2 min.  
240 fps  
120 fps  
(320 x 240)  
(640 x 480)  
66  
   
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
4
Basic Guide  
P Mode  
Advanced Guide  
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to [G] mode.  
[G]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure  
Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [G], make sure the function is available in that mode  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
(=193 201).  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)............... 68 Color and Continuous Shooting..................... 74 Flash.................................................................. 85  
Adjusting White Balance .......................................74  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)............75  
Continuous Shooting.............................................76  
Shooting Range and Focusing ....................... 77  
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths  
(Step Zoom) ..........................................................77  
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro).................................78  
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode...........................78  
Digital Tele-Converter............................................80  
Changing the AF Frame Mode..............................81  
Changing the Focus Setting..................................84  
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select).....84  
Shooting with the AF Lock.....................................85  
Changing the Flash Mode.....................................85  
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation .......86  
Shooting with the FE Lock ....................................87  
Changing the Flash Timing ...................................87  
Image Brightness (Exposure) ......................... 68  
Adjusting Image Brightness  
Setting Menu  
(Exposure Compensation) ....................................68  
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure  
(AE Lock) ..............................................................69  
Changing the Metering Method.............................69  
Changing the ISO Speed ......................................70  
Changing the Noise Reduction Level  
(High ISO NR).......................................................71  
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)...........72  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)..............72  
Using the ND Filter................................................73  
Accessories  
9
10  
Shooting RAW Images..................................... 88  
Appendix  
Other Settings .................................................. 89  
Changing the Compression Ratio  
(Image Quality)......................................................89  
Changing the IS Mode Settings ............................89  
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen  
Index  
Information ............................................................90  
67  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Image Brightness (Exposure)  
Before Use  
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)  
Still Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting  
style.  
Adjusting Image Brightness  
(Exposure Compensation)  
Basic Guide  
1 Enter [G] mode.  
Advanced Guide  
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop  
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.  
2zzSCeutsthteommoizdeedtihael tos[eGtt].ings as  
desired (=68 90), and  
then shoot.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Camera Basics  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzAs you watch the screen, turn the  
exposure compensation dial to adjust  
brightness.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzThe correction level you specified is now  
displayed.  
P Mode  
If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button  
halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this  
case, try adjusting the ISO speed (=70) or activating the flash (if subjects  
are dark, =85), which may enable adequate exposure.  
Movies can be recorded in [G] mode as well, by pressing the movie button.  
However, some FUNC. (=24) and MENU (=25) settings may be  
automatically adjusted for movie recording.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
For details on the shooting range in [G] mode, see “Shooting Range”  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
68  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure  
(AE Lock)  
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and  
exposure separately.  
Changing the Metering Method  
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting  
conditions as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Lock the exposure.  
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot  
with the exposure locked, and then press  
the < > button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zz[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is  
locked.  
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots.  
Evaluative  
P Mode  
2 Compose the shot and shoot.  
zzAfter one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is  
no longer displayed.  
Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Determines the average brightness of light across the entire  
image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area  
as more important.  
Center  
Weighted Avg.  
Playback Mode  
AE: Auto Exposure  
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame). You  
Spot  
Wi-Fi Functions  
After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed  
and aperture value by turning the <7> dial (Program Shift).  
can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (=70).  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
69  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Changing the ISO Speed  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame  
zzPress the < > button, turn the <7> dial  
to choose the ISO speed, and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
1 Set the metering method to [ ].  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
[
].  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Spot AE Point] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [AF Point] (=25).  
zzThe Spot AE Point frame will now be  
linked to the movement of the AF frame  
(=81).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the  
shooting mode and conditions.  
AUTO  
P Mode  
80, 100, 125, 160, 200  
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800  
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at  
twilight.  
Low  
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500,  
3200, 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000,  
10000, 12800  
Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (=82) or  
Playback Mode  
For shooting night scenes, or in dark  
rooms.  
High  
[Tracking AF] (=82).  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to [AUTO],  
press the shutter button halfway.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there  
may be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions.  
Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce  
subject blurriness and increase the flash range. However, shots may look  
grainy.  
Appendix  
Index  
70  
     
Cover  
Changing the Noise Reduction Level  
(High ISO NR)  
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].  
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings  
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified  
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of  
three levels.  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [High  
ISO NR] on the [4] tab, and then choose  
the desired option (=25).  
Advanced Guide  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [ISO  
Auto Settings] on the [4] tab, and then  
press the <m> button (=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and  
then choose the desired option (=25).  
P Mode  
Not available with [ ] or [ ] (=88).  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when the ISO speed  
setting screen (=70) is displayed, by pressing the <n> button.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
71  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)  
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or  
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal  
brightness.  
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To  
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels  
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time  
you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure  
(relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Choose [ ].  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or  
may cause images to appear grainy.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
[
] in the menu, and then choose [  
]
(=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
You can also correct existing images (=120).  
You can customize camera operation so that turning the <z> or <7> dial  
adjusts DR Correction or Shadow Correct settings (=96).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the < > button, and then adjust  
the setting by pressing the <q><r>  
buttons or turning the <7> dial.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
AEB shooting is only available in [!] mode (=86).  
Continuous shooting (=76) is not available in this mode.  
Appendix  
If exposure compensation is already in use (=68), the value specified for  
that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function.  
You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the <n>  
button when the exposure compensation screen (=68) is displayed.  
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [$] (=37).  
In [Blink Detection] mode (=48), this function is only available for the final  
shot.  
Index  
72  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)  
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out, as  
follows.  
Shadow Correct  
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the <m> button, choose  
] in the menu, and then choose [  
(=24).  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
[
]
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzOnce the setting is complete, [  
displayed.  
] is  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Using the ND Filter  
To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the  
ND filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to  
3 stops).  
P Mode  
Available ISO Speed  
Option  
Details  
(=70)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Automatic adjustment to prevent washed-out  
highlights  
AUTO, 80 – 12800  
AUTO, 160 – 3200  
AUTO, 320 – 3200  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <m> button, choose  
Tone down highlights by about 200% relative to  
the brightness level of [  
Tone down highlights by about 400% relative to  
the brightness level of [ ].  
].  
[
] in the menu, and then choose [  
]
Setting Menu  
(=24).  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
ISO speed (=70) will be adjusted to a speed within the  
supported range if you have specified a value outside the supported  
range indicated here.  
Index  
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still  
and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode]  
to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera  
(=89).  
ND: Neutral Density  
73  
       
Cover  
Color and Continuous Shooting  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Custom White Balance  
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white  
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white  
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.  
Adjusting White Balance  
Basic Guide  
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more  
natural for the scene you are shooting.  
Advanced Guide  
zzFollow the steps in “Adjusting White  
Balance” (=74) to choose [ ] or [ ].  
zzAim the camera at a plain white subject,  
so that the entire screen is white. Press  
the < > button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzThe tint of the screen changes once the  
white balance data has been recorded.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after  
recording white balance data.  
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting  
Auto  
conditions.  
Playback Mode  
Day Light  
Cloudy  
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Wi-Fi Functions  
For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight.  
Manually Correcting White Balance  
For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting  
and similarly colored fluorescent lighting.  
Setting Menu  
Tungsten  
You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the  
effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter  
or color-compensating filter.  
For shooting under warm-white (or similarly colored) or cool-  
white fluorescent lighting.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Fluorescent  
Appendix  
For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored  
fluorescent lighting.  
Fluorescent H  
Flash  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzFollow the steps in “Adjusting White  
Balance” (=74) to choose the white  
balance option.  
Index  
For shooting with the flash.  
h
Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones  
down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall.  
Underwater  
Custom  
S
zzTurn the <z> dial to adjust the  
correction level for B and A.  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is  
displayed.  
For manually setting a custom white balance (=74).  
74  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
2 Configure advanced settings.  
zzTo configure more advanced settings,  
press the <n> button and turn  
the <z> or <7> dial to adjust the  
correction level.  
Before Use  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)  
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia  
or black and white.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
zzTo reset the correction level, press the  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Advanced Guide  
<
> button.  
zzPress the <n> button to complete  
the setting.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you  
switch to another white balance option in step 1, but correction  
levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
My Colors Off  
Vivid  
P Mode  
B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green  
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images  
sharper.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color  
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature unit representing color  
temperature conversion filter density)  
You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen  
can be accessed simply by turning the <z> dial (=96).  
Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued  
images.  
Neutral  
Playback Mode  
Sepia  
B/W  
Creates sepia tone images.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Creates black and white images.  
Setting Menu  
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid  
Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling  
images on positive film.  
Positive Film  
Accessories  
9
10  
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.  
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.  
Appendix  
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and  
other blue subjects more vivid.  
Index  
Vivid Blue  
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage,  
and other green subjects more vivid.  
Vivid Green  
Vivid Red  
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid.  
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other  
qualities as desired (=76).  
Custom Color  
75  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
White balance (=74) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.  
With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may  
change. These settings may not produce the expected results with  
some skin tones.  
Before Use  
Continuous Shooting  
Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
Advanced Guide  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Custom Color  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,  
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzFollow the steps in “Changing Image  
Color Tones (My Colors)” (=75) to  
P Mode  
2 Shoot.  
choose [ ], and then press the <  
button.  
>
zzHold the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot continuously.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Mode  
Description  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
an option, and then specify the value by  
pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning  
the <7> dial.  
zzFor stronger/more intense effects (or  
darker skin tones), adjust the value to  
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects  
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to  
the left.  
Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined  
when you press the shutter button halfway.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Continuous  
Continuous  
W
Continuous shooting and focusing.  
Shooting AF* [AF Frame] is set to [Center] and cannot be changed.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
* In [t] mode (=53), manual focus mode (=78), or when AF is locked  
9
10  
(=85), [ ] is changed to [ ].  
Appendix  
Cannot be used with the self-timer (=36) or [Blink Detection]  
(=48).  
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow  
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the  
zoom position.  
Index  
zzPress the < > button to complete the  
setting.  
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.  
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.  
76  
     
Cover  
Shooting Range and Focusing  
When using Face ID (=39), the location in the image where the name is  
recorded will be determined in the first shot, and will be recorded in the same  
place for further shots.  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths  
(Step Zoom)  
Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Images Displayed during Playback  
Each set of images shot continuously in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode is  
Advanced Guide  
You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 28, 35, 50, 85, 100 or 140 mm  
(35mm film equivalent). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the  
angle of view of those focal lengths.  
managed as a single group, and only the first image in that group will be  
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [  
in the upper left of the screen.  
] is displayed  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Assign [  
] to the <z> dial  
If you erase a grouped image (=114), all images in the group are  
also erased. Be careful when erasing images.  
(=96).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a focal length.  
zzTurn the <z> dial clockwise until it  
clicks to change the focal length from  
28 mm to 35 mm. Keep turning the <z>  
dial to increase the focal length, which  
changes to 50, 85, 100, and 140 mm at  
each click.  
Grouped images can be played back individually (=108) and ungrouped  
(=108).  
Protecting (=111) a grouped image will protect all images in the group.  
Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image  
Search (=106) or Smart Shuffle (=110). In this case, images are  
temporarily ungrouped.  
These actions are not available for grouped images: magnifying (=109),  
editing Face ID information (=108), tagging as favorites (=117), editing  
(=118 121), printing (=176), setting up individual image printing  
(=181), or adding to a photobook (=182). To do these things, either view  
grouped images individually (=108) or cancel grouping (=108) first.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn  
the <z> dial.  
Accessories  
9
10  
When using the digital zoom (=35), turning the <z> dial clockwise will  
not change the zoom factor. However, turning the <z> dial counterclockwise  
will set the focal length to 140 mm.  
Appendix  
Index  
77  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)  
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [e]. For  
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode  
Common Camera  
Operations  
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can  
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway  
to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position  
you specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range”  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the <q> button, choose [e] (either  
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [f].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the <o> button, and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzOnce the setting is complete, [e] is  
displayed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zz[f] and the MF indicator are displayed.  
P Mode  
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.  
Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Specify the general focal  
position.  
To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting  
with the camera set to [[] (=37).  
Playback Mode  
zzReferring to the on-screen MF indicator  
bar (which shows the distance and focal  
position) and the magnified display area,  
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to specify the general focal  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
MF Indicator  
position, and then press the <m> button.  
Appendix  
zzTo adjust the magnification, press the  
<r> button.  
Index  
zzMove the focusing frame as needed  
(=81).  
78  
         
Cover  
3 Fine-tune the focus.  
zzPress the shutter button halfway to have  
the camera fine-tune the focal position  
(Safety MF).  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)  
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing  
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection  
as needed.  
Basic Guide  
zzTo cancel manual focus, press the <q>  
button.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [MF  
Peaking Settings] on the [4] tab, and  
then choose [On] (=25).  
When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (=81) is  
[FlexiZone] and AF frame size (=81) is [Normal], and these  
settings cannot be changed.  
Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (=35) or digital  
tele-converter (=80), or when using a TV as a display (=165),  
but the magnified display will not appear.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and  
then choose the desired option (=25).  
P Mode  
To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it.  
To hide or enlarge the magnified display area, press the <n> button and  
adjust the [MF-Point Zoom] settings on the [4] tab as needed (=25).  
To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed  
halfway, press the <n> button and set [Safety MF] on the [4] tab to [Off]  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.  
Playback Mode  
(=25).  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
79  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Digital Tele-Converter  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)  
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 2.0x.  
This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it  
would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom  
factor.  
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the  
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther  
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your  
specified focus can be set in three levels.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Digital Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose the desired option (=25).  
zzThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor  
is displayed on the screen.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [ ].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose  
[
] in the menu, and then choose [  
]
Other Shooting  
Modes  
(=24).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom  
(=35) or AF-point zoom (=47).  
2 Configure the setting.  
Playback Mode  
zzPress the < > button, and then adjust  
the setting by pressing the <q><r>  
buttons or turning the <7> dial.  
The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [2.0x] are 42.0 – 210.0 mm  
and 56.0 – 280.0 mm (35mm film equivalent).  
The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the  
way toward <i> for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge  
the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects  
(Digital Zoom)” (=35).  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Focus bracketing is only available in [!] mode (=86).  
Continuous shooting (=76) is not available in this mode.  
Appendix  
Index  
You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the <n>  
button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” (=78).  
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [$] (=37).  
In [Blink Detection] mode (=48), this function is only available for the final  
shot.  
80  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Changing the AF Frame Mode  
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as  
follows.  
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF  
frame mode to [FlexiZone] (=81).  
Basic Guide  
1 Prepare to move the AF frame.  
zzPress the < > button. The AF frame  
turns orange.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [AF  
Frame] on the [4] tab, and then choose  
the desired option (=25).  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Move and resize the AF frame.  
zzTurn the <7> dial to move the AF frame,  
or press the <o><p><q><r> buttons  
to move it by a smaller amount.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
zzTo return the AF frame to the original  
P Mode  
position in the center, keep the <  
>
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
FlexiZone/Center  
button held down.  
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing.  
With [FlexiZone], you can move and resize the AF frame (=81).  
zzTo reduce the AF frame size, press the  
<n> button. Press it again to restore  
it to the original size.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus  
when you press the shutter button halfway.  
3 Finish the setup process.  
Setting Menu  
zzPress the < > button.  
To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner,  
first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold  
the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button  
halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all  
the way down (Focus Lock).  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
81  
         
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Face AiAF  
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)  
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.  
Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative  
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).  
Basic Guide  
1 Choose [Tracking AF].  
After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed  
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main  
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected  
faces.  
Advanced Guide  
zzFollow the steps in “Changing the AF  
Frame Mode” (=81) to choose  
[Tracking AF].  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zz[ ] is displayed in the center of the  
screen.  
When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects,  
within a certain range.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are  
displayed around faces in focus.  
2 Choose a subject to focus on.  
zzAim the camera so that [ ] is on the  
desired subject, and then press the <  
button.  
P Mode  
>
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed  
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the  
areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.  
If faces are not detected when Servo AF (=83) is set to [On], the  
AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press  
the shutter button halfway.  
Examples of faces that cannot be detected:  
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close  
- Subjects that are dark or light  
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzWhen the subject is detected, the camera  
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the  
subject moves, the camera will continue  
to track the subject within a certain range.  
zzIf no subject is detected, [ ] is  
displayed.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.  
No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you  
press the shutter button halfway.  
Index  
zzTo cancel tracking, press the < > button  
again.  
82  
     
Cover  
3 Shoot.  
Still Images  
Before Use  
zzPress the shutter button halfway. [  
]
changes to a blue [ ], which follows  
the subject as the camera continues to  
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)  
(=83).  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Shooting with Servo AF  
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the  
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long  
as you press the shutter button halfway.  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Servo AF] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [On] (=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzEven after your shot, [ ] is still  
displayed and the camera continues to  
track the subject.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Focus.  
[Servo AF] (=83) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.  
zzThe focus and exposure are maintained  
where the blue AF frame is displayed  
while you are pressing the shutter button  
halfway.  
Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move  
too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the  
background too closely.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
[AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.  
Playback Mode  
[e] is not available.  
Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.  
In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames  
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this  
case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF  
frame mode.  
If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and  
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button,  
and then press it halfway again.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway  
without pressing the <  
center of the screen.  
> button. After your shot, [ ] is displayed in the  
Setting Menu  
If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people  
are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still images (=39).  
However, a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as  
a person detected with Face ID.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
AF lock shooting is not available.  
Index  
[AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.  
Not available when using the self-timer (=36).  
83  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Changing the Focus Setting  
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)  
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on  
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead,  
you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button  
halfway.  
Basic Guide  
1 Prepare the camera for Face  
Select.  
Advanced Guide  
zzSet the AF frame to [Face AiAF]  
(=82).  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Continuous AF] on the [4] tab, and then  
choose [Off] (=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Enter Face Select mode.  
zzAim the camera at the person’s face and  
press the < > button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzAfter [Face Select : On] is displayed, a  
face frame [ ] is displayed around the  
face detected as the main subject.  
zzEven if the subject moves, the face frame  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera  
constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway.  
On  
[
] follows the subject within a certain  
Playback Mode  
Off  
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly.  
range.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzIf a face is not detected, [ ] is not  
displayed.  
Setting Menu  
3 Choose the face to focus on.  
zzTo switch the face frame [ ] to another  
detected face, press the < > button.  
zzAfter you have switched the face frame  
to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off]  
is displayed, and the specified AF frame  
mode screen is displayed again.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
84  
     
Cover  
4 Shoot.  
Flash  
Before Use  
zzPress the shutter button halfway. After the  
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].  
zzPress the shutter button all the way down  
to shoot.  
Still Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Changing the Flash Mode  
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on  
Basic Guide  
the flash range, see “Flash Range” (=205).  
Advanced Guide  
When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people detected are  
not displayed when you have selected another, unregistered face to focus on.  
However, their names will be recorded in the still images (=39).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Raise the flash.  
zzMove the < > switch.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <r> button, choose a flash  
mode (either press the <q><r> buttons  
or turn the <7> dial), and then press the  
<m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Movies  
Shooting with the AF Lock  
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.  
zzThe option you configured is now  
displayed.  
Playback Mode  
1 Lock the focus.  
zzWith the shutter button pressed halfway,  
press the <o> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the <r> button  
when the flash is lowered. Move the < > switch to raise the flash,  
then configure the setting.  
Setting Menu  
zzThe focus is now locked, and [f] and  
the MF indicator are displayed.  
zzTo unlock the focus, hold the shutter  
button halfway down and press the <o>  
button again.  
Accessories  
9
10  
[
] Auto  
Appendix  
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.  
Index  
2 Compose the shot and shoot.  
[h] On  
Fires for each shot.  
[Z] Slow Synchro  
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a  
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.  
85  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
In [Z] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures  
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should  
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure  
the camera (=89).  
Before Use  
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation  
Just as with regular exposure compensation (=68), you can adjust the  
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
In [Z] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject  
does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.  
zzRaise the flash, press the <r> button and  
immediately turn the <z> dial to choose  
the compensation level, and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzThe correction level you specified is now  
displayed.  
Advanced Guide  
[!] Off  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For shooting without the flash.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button  
halfway in low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take  
other measures to keep it still.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the  
shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed-  
out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate  
automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing  
MENU (=25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Safety FE] ►  
[Off].  
You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by choosing [X] in  
the FUNC. menu (=24), or by accessing MENU (=25) and choosing  
[4] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].  
You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen (=25) as  
follows (except when an optional external flash is mounted).  
- Press and hold the <r> button for at least one second.  
- When the flash is up, press the <r> button and immediately press the  
<n> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
86  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Shooting with the FE Lock  
Just as with the AE lock (=69), you can lock the exposure for the flash  
shots.  
Changing the Flash Timing  
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash  
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press  
the <m> button (=25).  
1 Raise the flash and set it to [h]  
Advanced Guide  
(=85).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Lock the flash exposure.  
zzAim the camera at the subject to shoot  
with the exposure locked, and then press  
the < > button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose  
the desired option (=25).  
zzThe flash fires, and when  
P Mode  
[
] is displayed, the flash output level is  
retained.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
1st-curtain  
2nd-curtain  
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.  
The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.  
3 Compose the shot and shoot.  
zzAfter one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is  
no longer displayed.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
FE: Flash Exposure  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
87  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images  
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated  
software (=173).  
Digital zoom (=35), date stamps (=38), and red-eye  
reduction (=45) are set to [Off] in [ ] and [ ] modes.  
Additionally, noise reduction level (=71), i-Contrast (=72)  
and My Colors (=75) cannot be configured.  
Before Use  
Shooting RAW Images  
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no  
loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use  
Digital Photo Professional (=173) to adjust RAW images as desired with  
minimal loss of image quality.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for  
RAW images is .CR2.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal  
image quality and compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression  
process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original,  
unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image  
quality.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with  
essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing. The  
data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must  
first use the software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary  
JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.  
For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot.  
The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without using the  
software.  
Index  
88  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Other Settings  
Before Use  
Changing the IS Mode Settings  
Still Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [IS  
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press  
the <m> button (=25).  
Changing the Compression Ratio  
(Image Quality)  
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as  
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [IS Mode], and then choose the  
desired option (=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the <m> button, choose [ ] in  
the menu, and choose the desired option  
(=24).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically  
applied (Intelligent IS) (=34).  
Continuous  
P Mode  
Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.  
Off Deactivates image stabilization.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.  
Playback Mode  
If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the  
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this  
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
89  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Movies  
Before Use  
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen  
Information  
Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed to  
a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting  
is useful in modes such as [ ] (=62).  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown  
before Shooting  
Basic Guide  
During movie recording, a smaller image display area is shown, with the  
subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting other distortion such as  
rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before  
shooting, you can disable this image stabilization.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Night  
Display] on the [4] tab, and then choose  
[On] (=25).  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzFollow the steps in “Changing the IS  
Mode Settings” (=89) to access the  
[IS Settings] screen.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose  
[2] (=34).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
The color is not adjusted in Playback mode.  
Playback Mode  
You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at  
the same size shown before shooting.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
90  
   
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
5
Basic Guide  
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode  
Advanced Guide  
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode).............. 92 Customization for Shooting Styles ................ 95 Customizing the FUNC. Menu  
(FUNC. Menu Layout) ..................................... 98  
Customizing Display Information...........................95  
Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and Control  
Dial........................................................................96  
Convenient Control Using the <  
Button....................................................................97  
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ............ 93  
Setting Menu  
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu.................98  
Saving Shooting Settings......................................99  
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items  
(My Menu)...........................................................100  
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values  
([M] Mode)........................................................ 93  
Adjusting the Flash Output....................................94  
Accessories  
9
10  
> or Movie  
Appendix  
Index  
91  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay  
before you can shoot again, as images are processed to remove  
noise.  
When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS  
Mode] to [Off] (=89).  
Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second. If you  
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the speed  
to 1/2000 second before shooting.  
Before Use  
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)  
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera  
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Enter [M] mode.  
Camera Basics  
zzSet the mode dial to [M].  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter  
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard  
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is  
displayed in white, or use safety shift (=93).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Set the shutter speed.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to set the shutter  
speed.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.  
P Mode  
[M]: Time value  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the  
shutter speed (=96).  
Playback Mode  
Shutter Speed (sec.)  
Available ISO Speed (=70)  
AUTO, 80 – 3200  
AUTO, 80 – 12800  
15 – 1.3  
Wi-Fi Functions  
1 – 1/4000  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
92  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture  
Values ([M] Mode)  
Before Use  
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)  
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera  
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and  
aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Enter [B] mode.  
Camera Basics  
zzSet the mode dial to [B].  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Enter [D] mode.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Set the aperture value.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to set the aperture  
value.  
zzSet the mode dial to [D].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to set the shutter  
speed, and turn the <7> dial to set the  
aperture value.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzAn exposure level mark based on your  
specified value is shown on the exposure  
Playback Mode  
Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button  
halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.  
Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in  
white, or use safety shift (see below).  
level indicator for comparison to the  
standard exposure level.  
Aperture Value  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Shutter Speed  
zzThe exposure level mark is shown in  
Setting Menu  
orange when the difference from standard  
exposure exceeds 2 stops.  
Exposure Level  
Standard  
[B]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)  
To avoid exposure problems in [M] and [B] modes, you can have the  
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when  
standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the <n> button  
and set [Safety Shift] on the [4] tab to [On] (=25).  
Accessories  
9
10  
Exposure  
Level Indicator  
Appendix  
Exposure Level  
Mark  
Index  
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.  
You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the  
aperture value (=96).  
Shutter Speed (sec.)  
Available ISO Speed (=70)  
250 – 40  
30 – 1.3  
80  
80 – 3200  
1 – 1/4000  
80 – 12800  
93  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level  
may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.  
Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter  
speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the  
same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [h].  
Use a sufficiently charged battery when shooting with the shutter  
speed set from 40 to 250 seconds, because the longer shooting  
time shortens battery life more than other shooting methods.  
To have both the shutter speed and aperture value automatically  
adjusted to obtain standard exposure, hold the shutter button  
halfway and press the < > button. Note that standard exposure  
may not be possible with some settings.  
Before Use  
Adjusting the Flash Output  
Choose from the three flash levels in [D] mode.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
1 Enter [D] mode.  
zzSet the mode dial to [D].  
Advanced Guide  
2 Configure the setting.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzRaise the flash, press the <r> button and  
immediately turn the <z> dial to choose  
the flash level, and then press the <m>  
button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.  
zzOnce the setting is complete, the flash  
output level is displayed.  
P Mode  
[D]: Manual  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
[
]: low, [  
]: medium, [  
]: high  
Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method  
(=69).  
The battery level indicated is based on estimated battery consumption under  
the current shutter speed setting. Changing the shutter speed may cause this  
level to be updated.  
You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial adjusts the  
shutter speed and turning the <z> dial adjusts the aperture value (=96).  
You can also set the flash level by choosing [X] in the FUNC. menu (=24),  
or by accessing MENU (=25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Control] ►  
[Flash Output].  
You can set the flash level in [M] or [B] mode by accessing MENU  
(=25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Mode] ►  
[Manual].  
You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen as follows  
(except when an optional external flash is mounted).  
- Press and hold the <r> button for at least one second.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
- When the flash is up, press the <r> button and immediately press the  
<n> button.  
Index  
94  
 
Cover  
3 Configure the setting.  
Customization for Shooting Styles  
Before Use  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose an item, and  
then press the <m> button. Items you  
choose for display are labeled with [ ].  
zzSelected items (labeled with a [ ]) will  
be included in display.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Customizing Display Information  
Set the number of custom displays (=23) and what information is  
displayed in each display when the <p> button is pressed in shooting  
screen.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Shooting Info  
Grid Lines  
Displays shooting information (=191).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Displays a reference grid.  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Custom Display] on the [4] tab, and  
then press the <m> button (=25).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Electronic  
Level  
Displays the electronic level (=47).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Histogram  
Displays a histogram (=103) in [G], [M], [B], and [D] modes.  
P Mode  
2 Choose [LCD/Viewfinder].  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial, and then press the  
<m> button to configure custom displays  
Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway  
and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings  
screen.  
Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be  
displayed in some shooting modes.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
[
], [ ] or [ ] which are displayed  
Wi-Fi Functions  
when the <p> button is pressed.  
Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.  
zzPress the <m> button to add [ ] ([ ],  
Setting Menu  
[
], or [ ]) to custom displays so that  
Accessories  
they do not display when the <p> button  
is pressed.  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzNote that [ ] cannot be applied to [LCD/  
Viewfinder] custom display currently in  
use.  
Index  
95  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Assignable Functions  
Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and  
Functions you can assign to the front dial and control dial vary depending  
on shooting mode. On the setting screen, you can assign aspect ratio  
switching (=44), ISO speed (=70), dynamic range correction  
(=73), shadow correction (=73), white balance correction (=74),  
step zooming (=77), or manual focusing (=78) in modes indicated  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Control Dial  
Assign commonly used functions to the front dial and control dial, by  
shooting mode.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
by  
in the following table.  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Set  
z7Func.] on the [4] tab, and then  
Camera Basics  
Shooting Mode  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item  
D B M  
G
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
press the < > button (=25).  
m
z
7
M B M  
Front Dial 1  
Front Dial 2  
Front Dial 3  
Control Dial  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
item.  
B,  
z B B M  
P Mode  
zzTo configure the settings, press the  
<o><p> buttons, choose an item (either  
press the <o><p><q><r> buttons  
or turn the <7> dial), and then turn the  
<z> dial to change the function.  
7
M,  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
z B, M B M  
Playback Mode  
7
z
Wi-Fi Functions  
7 B, M B M  
Setting Menu  
[B]: aperture value (=93); [M]: shutter speed (=92)  
Accessories  
9
10  
When multiple functions are assigned to the <7> dial, press the <  
to switch between them.  
Selecting [Front Dial 3] enables you to adjust Program Shift (=69), ISO  
Speed (=70), and Manual Focus (=78) on relevant setting screens by  
using <z> dial.  
> button  
Appendix  
Index  
96  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set Shortcut button] or [ ] in [Set  
button].  
Before Use  
Convenient Control Using the < > or Movie  
Button  
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the < > or  
movie button.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in the current  
shooting mode or under current function conditions.  
With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records white balance data  
(=74), and the white balance setting changes to [ ] or [ ].  
With [%], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks the focus. [%]  
is then displayed.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Access the setting screen.  
With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen display. To restore  
the display, do any of the following.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Set  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Shortcut button] or [Set  
button] on the  
- Press any button (other than the power button)  
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button  
(=25).  
- Hold the camera in another orientation  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
- Raise or lower the flash  
You can still record movies in [ ], [E] or [ ] mode even if you assign a  
function to the movie button.  
2 Configure the setting.  
P Mode  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose a function to  
assign, and then press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
3 Use the assigned function as  
needed.  
zzTo activate an assigned function, press  
the button you assigned it to.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
97  
 
Cover  
3 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [OK]  
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Customizing the FUNC. Menu  
(FUNC. Menu Layout)  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not shown  
on this menu will be available on the [4] tab of the menu screen.  
Basic Guide  
The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the <m> button  
when the FUNC. menu is displayed.  
Items that you remove from the FUNC. menu, add to My Menu (=100), and  
then add to the FUNC. menu again will be removed from My Menu.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Advanced Guide  
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [4]  
tab, and then press the <m> button  
(=25).  
Rearranging Menu Items  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Choosing  
Items to Include in the Menu” (=98),  
press the < > button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <m> or <r> button to choose  
an icon to move. Press the <o><p>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose  
the new position, and then press the  
<m> or <q> button.  
Playback Mode  
2 Choose icons to include in the  
menu.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons  
or turn the <7> dial and then press the  
<m> button to choose icons to include  
in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are  
marked with a [ ].  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [OK]  
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzSelected items (labeled with a [ ]) will be  
included in display.  
Index  
zzItems without a [ ] will be available on  
the [4] tab of the menu screen.  
98  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
3 Save the settings.  
Before Use  
Saving Shooting Settings  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose the destination, and  
then press the <m> button.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings  
for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to [  
or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting  
]
Basic Guide  
modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained  
this way.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [  
or [ ], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These  
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.  
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Settings that can be saved  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Shooting modes ([G], [M], [B], and [D])  
Items set in [G], [M], [B], or [D] modes (=68 94)  
Shooting menu settings  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
To clear information you have saved to [ ] or [ ] and restore default values,  
turn the mode dial to [ ] or [ ] and choose [Reset All] (=157).  
P Mode  
Zoom positions  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Manual focus positions (=78)  
My Menu settings (=100)  
Playback Mode  
1 Enter a shooting mode with  
Wi-Fi Functions  
settings you want to save, and  
change the settings as desired.  
Setting Menu  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Save  
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press  
the <m> button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
99  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
3 Rearrange menu items, as  
needed.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Sort], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzChoose a menu item to move (either  
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Before Use  
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items  
(My Menu)  
You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the [  
tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly from  
Common Camera  
Operations  
]
Basic Guide  
a single screen.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [My  
Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then  
press the <m> button (=25).  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to change the order, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may not  
be available in some shooting modes.  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Select items], and  
then press the <m> button.  
zzChoose up to five menu items to save  
(either press the <o><p> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial), and then press the  
<m> button.  
Playback Mode  
To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the <n> button in  
Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and press the <q><r> buttons to  
choose [Yes].  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zz[ ] is displayed.  
zzTo cancel saving, press the <m> button.  
Index  
[
] is no longer displayed.  
zzPress the <n> button.  
100  
 
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
6
Basic Guide  
Playback Mode  
Advanced Guide  
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To prepare the camera for these operations, press the <1> button to enter Playback mode.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from  
other cameras.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Viewing Slideshows ............................................ 110  
Auto Playback of Related Images  
(Smart Shuffle).................................................... 110  
Viewing............................................................ 102  
Convenient Control Using the <  
Button ............................................................ 118  
>
Switching Display Modes ....................................103  
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting  
Still Images (Digest Movies)................................104  
Checking People Detected in Face ID ................105  
Playback Mode  
Editing Still Images........................................ 118  
Protecting Images...........................................111  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Resizing Images.................................................. 118  
Cropping.............................................................. 119  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)..........120  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)............120  
Correcting Red-Eye.............................................121  
Choosing a Selection Method ..............................111  
Choosing Images Individually ............................. 112  
Selecting a Range............................................... 112  
Specifying All Images at Once ............................ 113  
Browsing and Filtering Images..................... 105  
Setting Menu  
Navigating through Images in an Index...............105  
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions ..106  
Using the Front Dial to Filter by [ ] or [ ] or  
Jump by [ ] or [ ] ...........................................107  
Viewing Individual Images in a Group.................108  
Accessories  
9
10  
Erasing Images............................................... 114  
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ........................ 114  
Rotating Images ............................................. 116  
Deactivating Auto Rotation.................................. 116  
Tagging Images as Favorites........................ 117  
Editing Movies................................................ 122  
Appendix  
Reducing File Sizes ............................................123  
Editing Digest Movies..........................................123  
Editing Face ID Information .......................... 108  
Index  
Image Viewing Options.................................. 109  
Magnifying Images..............................................109  
101  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
zzMovies are identified by a [  
] icon. To  
Before Use  
Viewing  
play movies, go to step 3.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as  
follows.  
Basic Guide  
1 Enter Playback mode.  
zzPress the <1> button.  
zzYour last shot is displayed.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 Play movies.  
zzTo start playback, press the <m> button  
to access the movie control panel,  
choose [ ] (either press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then  
press the <m> button again.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Browse through your images.  
zzTo view the previous image, press  
the <q> button or turn the <7> dial  
counterclockwise. To view the next  
image, press the <r> button or turn the  
<7> dial clockwise.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
4 Adjust the volume.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to adjust the  
volume.  
Volume Indicator  
Playback Mode  
zzPress and hold the <q><r> buttons to  
browse through images quickly.  
zzTo adjust the volume when the volume  
indicator is no longer displayed, press the  
<o><p> buttons.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
5 Pause playback.  
zzTo pause or resume playback, press the  
<m> button.  
zzAfter the movie is finished, [  
displayed.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzTo access Scroll Display mode, turn the  
<7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the  
<7> dial to browse through images.  
zzTo return to single-image display, press  
the <m> button.  
] is  
Index  
zzTo browse images grouped by shooting  
date, press the <o><p> buttons in  
Scroll Display mode.  
102  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button  
halfway.  
To deactivate Scroll Display, press the <n> button, choose [Scroll  
Display] on the [1] tab, and then choose [Off].  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)  
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed  
If you prefer to have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback  
mode, press the <n> button, and on the [1] tab, choose [Resume] and  
then [Last shot].  
information display (=103).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
Movies  
To change the transition shown between images, press the <n> button,  
choose [Transition Effect] on the [1] tab, and then choose the desired effect.  
Camera Basics  
Histogram  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
High  
Low  
Still Images  
Movies  
zzThe graph in detailed information display  
(=103) is a histogram showing the  
distribution of brightness in the image.  
The horizontal axis represents the degree  
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how  
much of the image is at each level of  
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a  
way to check exposure.  
Switching Display Modes  
Press the <p> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide  
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback  
(Detailed Information Display)” (=192).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Dark  
Bright  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
zzThe histogram can also be accessed  
while shooting (=95, 191).  
Wi-Fi Functions  
No Information  
Display  
Simple  
Information  
Display  
Detailed  
Information  
Display  
RGB Histogram,  
GPS Information  
Display  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
103  
           
Cover  
Movies  
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting  
Still Images (Digest Movies)  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display  
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (=31) on a day  
zzThe RGB histogram shows the  
Basic Guide  
of still image shooting as follows.  
distribution of shades of red, green, and  
blue in an image. The horizontal axis  
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the  
vertical axis, how much of the image is  
at that level of brightness. Viewing this  
histogram enables you to check image  
color characteristics.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Choose an image.  
Camera Basics  
zzChoose a still image labeled with [  
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
and press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzUsing a smartphone connected to the  
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images  
on the camera, adding information such  
as latitude, longitude, and elevation  
(=146). You can review this information  
in the GPS information display.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Play the movie.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK].  
Playback Mode  
zzThe movie recorded automatically on the  
day of still image shooting is played back,  
from the beginning.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzLatitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC  
(shooting date and time) are listed from  
top to bottom.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
After a moment, [  
] will no longer be displayed when you are using the  
[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on  
your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.  
camera with information display deactivated (=103).  
Appendix  
Index  
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean  
Time  
GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information.  
104  
   
Cover  
Browsing and Filtering Images  
Before Use  
Viewing by Date  
Digest movies can be viewed by date.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Navigating through Images in an Index  
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images  
1 Choose a movie.  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [List/  
Play Digest Movies] on the [1] tab, and  
then choose a date (=25).  
you are looking for.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Play the movie.  
1 Display images in an index.  
zzMove the zoom lever toward <g> to  
display images in an index. Moving the  
lever again will increase the number of  
images shown.  
zzPress the <m> button to start playback.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Checking People Detected in Face ID  
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (=103), the  
names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (=39) will be  
displayed.  
P Mode  
zzTo display fewer images, move the zoom  
lever toward <k>. Fewer images are  
shown each time you move the lever.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
2 Choose an image.  
zzTurn the <7> dial to scroll through the  
images.  
zzPress the <p> button several times until  
simple information display is activated,  
and then press the <q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose an image.  
zzNames will be displayed on detected  
people.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to  
choose an image.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the  
selected image.  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzPress the <m> button to view the  
selected image in single-image display.  
Index  
If you do not want names to display on images shot using Face ID, press the  
<n> button, choose [Face ID Info] on the [1] tab, and then set [Name  
Display] to [Off].  
To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the <o><p>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial rapidly), press the <n> button, and on the  
[1] tab, set [Index Effect] to [Off].  
105  
             
Cover  
Still Images  
Finding Images Matching Specified  
Conditions  
Movies  
2 Choose the second condition  
and check the images found.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose  
another condition. Once you turn the  
<7> dial, you can view the images  
narrowed down by your conditions.  
zzTo cancel this mode, press the <n>  
button.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering  
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect  
(=111) or delete (=114) these images all at once.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Favorites  
Shot Date  
People  
Displays images tagged as favorites (=117).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzTo switch to filtered image display, press  
the <m> button and go to step 3.  
Displays the images shot on a specific date.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Displays images with detected faces.  
3 View the filtered images.  
zzImages matching your conditions are  
displayed in yellow frames. To view  
only these images, press the <q><r>  
buttons, or turn the <7> dial.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in  
Still image/Movie  
Name  
[
] mode (=31).  
P Mode  
Displays images of a registered person (=39).  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzTo cancel filtered display, press the <  
>
Still Images  
Movies  
Playback Mode  
button.  
Filtering Display by [ ], [ ], [ ], or [  
]
Wi-Fi Functions  
When the camera has found no corresponding images for some  
conditions, those conditions will not be available.  
1 Choose the first condition for  
image display or navigation.  
zzIn single-image display, press the <  
button, and then press the <o><p>  
buttons to choose a display filter.  
Setting Menu  
>
To show or hide information, press the <p> button in step 3.  
Slideshows” (=110). You can protect, erase, or print all images found or add  
them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzWhen [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can  
view only images matching this condition  
by pressing the <q><r> buttons or  
turning the <7> dial. To perform an  
action for all of these images together,  
press the <m> button and go to step 3.  
Index  
If you edit images and save them as new images (=118 121), a message  
is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown.  
106  
       
Cover  
Using the Front Dial to Filter by [ ] or [ ] or  
Jump by [ ] or [ ]  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Filtering Display by [  
]
Jump to Favorites  
Jump Shot Date  
Displays images tagged as favorites (=117).  
1 Choose [ ].  
Basic Guide  
Jumps to the first image in each group of images that  
were shot on the same date.  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Filtering Display by  
[
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ]” (=106), choose  
] and press the <m> button.  
Advanced Guide  
Jump 10 Images  
Jump 100 Images  
Jumps by 10 images at a time.  
Jumps by 100 images at a time.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose a person.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons  
to choose a person, and then press the  
<m> button.  
1 Choose a condition.  
zzChoose a condition (or jump method) in  
single-image display by turning the <z>  
dial and then pressing the <o><p>  
buttons.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 View the filtered images.  
zzFollow step 3 in “Filtering Display by [ ],  
Playback Mode  
[
], [ ], or [ ]” (=106) to view the  
2 View images matching your  
specified condition, or jump by  
the specified amount.  
zzTurn the <z> dial to view only images  
matching the condition or jump by the  
specified number of images forward or  
back.  
images.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
[ ] is not available unless people are registered (=39).  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Turning the <z> dial when browsing images in index display will jump to the  
previous or next image according to the jump method chosen in single-image  
display. However, if you have chosen [ ] or [ ], the jump method will be  
switched to [ ].  
Index  
107  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Editing Face ID Information  
Before Use  
Viewing Individual Images in a Group  
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Grouped images (either from continuous shooting (=76) in [  
G], [M],  
erase it.  
[
B
], or [D] mode (=67, 92, or 93) or individual still images saved  
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face  
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been  
erased.  
Basic Guide  
as source data in [ ] mode (=63)) are generally displayed together,  
but they can also be viewed individually.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Choose a grouped image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image labeled  
Changing Names  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Face ID Info] on the [1] tab (=25).  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
with [  
], and then press the <m>  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 View images in the group  
individually.  
zzPressing the <q><r> buttons or turning  
the <7> dial will display only images in  
the group.  
zzPressing the < > button will display  
[Display all images]. Press <m> to  
cancel group playback.  
2 Choose an image.  
choose an image and press the <m>  
button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
zzAn orange frame is displayed around the  
selected face. When multiple names are  
displayed in an image, press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose  
the name to change, and then press the  
<m> button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images quickly  
To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still images,  
press the <n> button, choose [Group Images] on the [1] tab, and then  
choose [Off] (=25). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during  
individual playback.  
Appendix  
Index  
108  
         
Cover  
3 Choose the editing option.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose [Overwrite],  
and then press the <m> button.  
Image Viewing Options  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Magnifying Images  
Basic Guide  
4 Choose the name of the person  
to overwrite with.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding  
Face Information” (=43) to choose  
the name of the person you want to  
overwrite with.  
1 Magnify an image.  
Advanced Guide  
zzMoving the zoom lever toward <k> will  
zoom in and magnify the image. You  
can magnify images up to about 10x by  
continuing to hold the zoom lever.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzTo zoom out, move the zoom lever  
toward <g>. You can return to single-  
image display by continuing to hold it.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Erasing Names  
zzFollowing step 3 in “Changing Names”  
(=109), choose [Erase] and press the  
<m> button.  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
P Mode  
2 Move the display position and  
switch images as needed.  
zzTo move the display position, press the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons.  
zzTo switch to other images while zoomed,  
turn the <7> dial.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Approximate Position of  
Displayed Area  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
You can return to single-image display from magnified display by pressing the  
Accessories  
<n> button.  
You can check the focus when [  
9
10  
] is displayed by pressing the <m>  
Appendix  
button to enlarge the AF frame position (Focus Check). Press the <m> button  
repeatedly to enlarge any other AF frames displayed.  
Index  
109  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Viewing Slideshows  
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.  
Auto Playback of Related Images  
(Smart Shuffle)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may  
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera  
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in  
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in  
many kinds of scenes.  
Basic Guide  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Slideshow] on the [1] tab  
(=25).  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Choose Smart Shuffle.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Smart Shuffle] on the [1] tab, and then  
press the <m> button (=25).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
P Mode  
zzChoose a menu item to configure, and  
then choose the desired option (=25).  
zzFour candidate images are displayed.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Start automatic playback.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Start], and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzThe slideshow will start after [Loading  
image] is displayed for a few seconds.  
zzPress the <n> button to stop the  
slideshow.  
Playback Mode  
2 Choose an image.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to  
choose the image you want to view next.  
zzYour chosen image is displayed in the  
center, surrounded by the next four  
candidate images.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzFor full-screen display of the center  
image, press the <m> button. To restore  
the original display, press the <m>  
button again.  
Appendix  
The camera’s power-saving functions (=21) are deactivated  
Index  
during slideshows.  
zzPress the <n> button to restore  
single-image display.  
To pause or resume slideshows, press the <m> button.  
You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the <q><r>  
buttons or turning the <7> dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the  
<q><r> buttons down.  
110  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart  
Shuffle.  
Before Use  
Protecting Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:  
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera  
- An unsupported image is currently displayed  
- Images are shown in filtered display (=106)  
- During group playback (=108)  
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera  
(=114).  
Basic Guide  
Choosing a Selection Method  
Advanced Guide  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Protect] on the [1] tab (=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Choose a selection method.  
zzChoose a menu item and an option as  
desired (=25).  
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the  
<n> button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the  
card (=153, 154).  
Appendix  
Index  
Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To  
erase them this way, first cancel protection.  
111  
     
Cover  
Choosing Images Individually  
Selecting a Range  
Before Use  
1 Choose [Select].  
1 Choose [Select Range].  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” (=111), choose [Select  
Method” (=111), choose [Select] and  
press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Range] and press the <m> button.  
Advanced Guide  
2 Choose an image.  
2 Choose a starting image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.  
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
zzRepeat this process to specify other  
images.  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Protect the image.  
zzPress the <n> button. A  
confirmation message is displayed.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
3 Choose an ending image.  
zzPress the <r> button to choose [Last  
image], and then press the <m> button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn  
the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.  
Appendix  
Index  
112  
     
Cover  
Specifying All Images at Once  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzImages before the first image cannot be  
selected as the last image.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
1 Choose [Select All Images].  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” (=111), choose [Select All  
Images] and press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
2 Protect the images.  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Protect], and then  
press the <m> button.  
4 Protect the images.  
zzPress the <p> button to choose  
[Protect], and then press the <m>  
button.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of  
“Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
You can also choose the first or last image by turning the <7> dial when the  
top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
113  
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Erasing Multiple Images at Once  
Before Use  
Erasing Images  
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when  
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected  
images (=111) cannot be erased.  
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing  
images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images  
(=111) cannot be erased.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Choosing a Selection Method  
Advanced Guide  
1 Choose an image to erase.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image.  
1 Access the setting screen.  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Erase] on the [1] tab (=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Erase the image.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <a> button.  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to  
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>  
button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Choose a selection method.  
zzChoose a menu item and an option as  
desired (=25).  
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the  
<n> button.  
zzThe current image is now erased.  
zzTo cancel erasure, press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose  
[Cancel], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Pressing the <a> button while [ ] images are displayed will give you  
the option of choosing [Erase  
], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase  
+JPEG] for  
Appendix  
deletion.  
Index  
114  
       
Cover  
Before Use  
Choosing Images Individually  
Selecting a Range  
1 Choose [Select].  
1 Choose [Select Range].  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” (=114), choose [Select  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” (=114), choose [Select] and  
press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Range] and press the <m> button.  
Advanced Guide  
2 Choose images.  
2 Choose an image.  
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”  
(=112) to specify images.  
zzOnce you choose an image following  
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”  
(=112), [ ] is displayed.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
3 Erase the images.  
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
zzRepeat this process to specify other  
images.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <p> button to choose [Erase],  
and then press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Erase the image.  
zzPress the <n> button. A  
confirmation message is displayed.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Playback Mode  
Specifying All Images at Once  
Wi-Fi Functions  
1 Choose [Select All Images].  
zzFollowing step 2 in “Choosing a Selection  
Method” (=114), choose [Select All  
Images] and press the <m> button.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
2 Erase the images.  
Appendix  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Index  
115  
 
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Deactivating Auto Rotation  
Before Use  
Rotating Images  
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.  
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates  
images based on the current camera orientation.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Auto  
Rotate] on the [1] tab, and then choose  
[Off] (=25).  
1 Choose [Rotate].  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
Advanced Guide  
[Rotate] on the [1] tab (=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Images cannot be rotated (=116) when you set [Auto Rotate] to  
[Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the  
original orientation.  
In Smart Shuffle (=110) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to  
[Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated  
images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.  
2 Rotate the image.  
P Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image.  
zzThe image is rotated 90° each time you  
press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
zzTo return to the menu screen, press the  
<n> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Movies with an image quality of [  
], [  
], or [  
] cannot  
be rotated.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (=116).  
Appendix  
Index  
116  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
3 Finish the setup process.  
zzPress the <n> button. A  
confirmation message is displayed.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Before Use  
Tagging Images as Favorites  
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a  
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all  
of those images.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting  
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in  
step 3.  
Auto Mode /  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
1 Choose [Favorites].  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Favorites] on the [1] tab (=25).  
Favorite images will have a three-star rating (  
) when transferred  
to computers running Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista. (Does not  
apply to movies or RAW images.)  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Appendix  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.  
zzTo untag the image, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
zzRepeat this process to choose additional  
images.  
Index  
117  
   
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Editing Still Images  
Before Use  
Convenient Control Using the < >  
Button  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Image editing (=118 121) is only available when the memory  
card has sufficient free space.  
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the <  
>
Basic Guide  
button.  
Still Images  
Advanced Guide  
Resizing Images  
1 Choose [Set Shortcut button].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Set Shortcut button] on the [1]  
tab (=25).  
Camera Basics  
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Choose [Resize].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Resize] on the [1] tab (=25).  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose a function to assign,  
and then press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
2 Choose an image.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
3 Use the assigned function as  
needed.  
zzPress the < > button to activate the  
assigned function.  
Playback Mode  
3 Choose an image size.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose the size, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
To restore default settings, choose [ ].  
Accessories  
9
10  
When [2] is assigned and you press the < > button while the camera is not  
connected to the printer, the image is designated for printing and will be printed  
once the printer is connected.  
zz[Save new image?] is displayed.  
Appendix  
Index  
4 Save the new image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.  
118  
         
Cover  
Cropping Area  
5 Review the new image.  
zzPress the <n> button. [Display new  
image?] is displayed.  
3 Adjust the cropping area.  
zzA frame is displayed around the portion of  
the image to be cropped.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzThe original image is shown in the upper  
left, and a preview of the image as  
cropped is shown in the lower right.  
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom  
lever.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzThe saved image is now displayed.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (=45)  
or saved as [ ] in step 3.  
RAW images cannot be edited.  
zzTo move the frame, press the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons.  
zzTo change the frame orientation, press  
the <m> button.  
zzFaces detected in the image are  
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left  
image. To crop the image based on this  
frame, turn the <7> dial to switch to the  
other frame.  
Preview of Image After  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Cropping  
Resolution After Cropping  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Still Images  
Cropping  
Playback Mode  
zzPress the <n> button.  
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
4 Save as a new image and  
review.  
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(=118 119).  
1 Choose [Cropping].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Cropping] on the [1] tab  
(=25).  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (=45)  
2 Choose an image.  
or resized to [ ] (=118).  
Index  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
RAW images cannot be edited.  
Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping.  
Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images.  
If you crop still images shot using Face ID (=39), only the names of the  
people left in the cropped image will remain.  
119  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)  
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate  
file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My  
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be  
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient  
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects  
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the  
image as a separate file.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Choose [My Colors].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [My Colors] on the [1] tab  
(=25).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Choose [i-Contrast].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [i-Contrast] on the [1] tab  
(=25).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Choose an option.  
Playback Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an option, and then  
press the <m> button.  
3 Choose an option.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an option, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Setting Menu  
4 Save as a new image and  
review.  
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(=118 119).  
Accessories  
9
10  
4 Save as a new image and  
review.  
zzFollow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(=118 119).  
Appendix  
Index  
Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little  
lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired  
color.  
For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause  
images to appear grainy.  
Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.  
Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.  
RAW images cannot be edited this way.  
The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color  
of images shot using My Colors (=75).  
120  
     
Cover  
4 Save as a new image and  
review.  
If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using  
[Low], [Medium], or [High].  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose [New File],  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzThe image is now saved as a new file.  
zzFollow step 5 in “Resizing Images”  
(=119).  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Correcting Red-Eye  
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the  
Advanced Guide  
corrected image as a separate file.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [1]  
tab (=25).  
Some images may not be corrected accurately.  
To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose  
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.  
Protected images cannot be overwritten.  
RAW images cannot be edited this way.  
Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [ ], but  
the original image cannot be overwritten.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
2 Choose an image.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image.  
Playback Mode  
3 Correct the image.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <m> button.  
zzRed-eye detected by the camera is now  
corrected, and frames are displayed  
around corrected image areas.  
zzEnlarge or reduce images as needed.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
121  
       
Cover  
Movies  
3 Review the edited movie.  
Before Use  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
Editing Movies  
[
], and then press the <m> button.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.  
The edited movie is now played.  
zzTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2.  
zzTo cancel editing, press the <o><p>  
buttons to choose [ ]. Press the <m>  
button, choose [OK] (either press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),  
and then press the <m> button again.  
Basic Guide  
1 Choose [*].  
zzFollowing steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”  
(=102), choose [*] and press the  
<m> button.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzThe movie editing panel and editing bar  
are now displayed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
4 Save the edited movie.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
Movie Editing Panel  
[
], and then press the <m> button.  
2 Specify portions to cut.  
P Mode  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose [New File],  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
[
] or [ ].  
zzTo view the portions you can cut  
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press  
the <q><r> buttons or turn the <7>  
dial to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the  
movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and  
cut the end of the movie by choosing  
Playback Mode  
zzThe movie is now saved as a new file.  
zzChoose [Save w/o Comp.], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Movie Editing Bar  
Accessories  
[
].  
zzIf you move [ ] to a position other than a  
] mark, in [ ] the portion before the  
9
10  
Appendix  
[
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,  
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest  
Index  
[
] mark on the right will be cut.  
122  
   
Cover  
Movies  
To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite]  
in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.  
If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be  
available.  
Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving  
is in progress.  
Before Use  
Editing Digest Movies  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Individual chapters (clips) (=31) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as  
needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or  
an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =160).  
1 Select the clip to erase.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short  
Movies Created When Shooting Still  
Images (Digest Movies)” (=104) to  
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and  
then press the <m> button to access the  
movie control panel.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Reducing File Sizes  
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
zzOn the screen in step 2 of “Editing  
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzChoose [Compress & Sav.], and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
2 Choose [ ].  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ ], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Compressed movies are saved in [  
[ ] movies cannot be compressed.  
] format.  
zzThe selected clip is played back repeatedly.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose  
[Overwrite].  
However, you can compress and save edited movies as new files by choosing  
[Compress & Sav.].  
3 Confirm erasure.  
Appendix  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Index  
zzThe clip is erased, and the short movie is  
overwritten.  
[ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a  
printer.  
123  
   
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
7
Basic Guide  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Advanced Guide  
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera  
with Web services  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Installing the Software.........................................131  
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection  
(Windows Only)...................................................133  
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi ......................... 125  
Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi............ 126  
Uploading Images to Web Services....................126  
Sending Images to a Smartphone.......................126  
Sending Images to Another Camera...................126  
Sending Images to a Computer ..........................127  
Printing Images Wirelessly..................................127  
Registering Web Services............................. 127  
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY .............128  
Registering Other Web Services.........................130  
Sending Images.............................................. 142  
Sending Images Individually ...............................142  
Sending Multiple Images.....................................143  
Adding Comments...............................................143  
Playback Mode  
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu............................. 133  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi..................................133  
After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection.........................134  
Saving Images to a Computer....................... 144  
Setting Menu  
Sending Images Automatically  
Connecting via an Access Point................... 134  
(Image Sync) ................................................. 145  
Initial Preparations ..............................................145  
Sending Images ..................................................146  
Accessories  
Confirming Access Point Compatibility................134  
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points..135  
Connecting to Access Points in the List ..............138  
9
10  
Appendix  
Geotagging Images on the Camera.............. 146  
Connecting without an Access Point........... 139  
Previous Access Points.......................................140  
Connecting to Another Camera.................... 141  
Installing CameraWindow on a  
Smartphone................................................... 130  
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings ................. 147  
Editing Connection Information...........................147  
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default...............148  
Index  
Preparing to Register a Computer................ 131  
Checking Your Computer Environment...............131  
124  
   
Cover  
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi  
Connecting to a Computer  
Use the software to wirelessly send images from the camera to  
a computer.  
Before Use  
This camera is an approved Wi-Fi®* product. You can wirelessly connect to  
and send images to the following devices and services.  
Note that, in this chapter, wireless LAN functions other than Wi-Fi may be  
referred to as Wi-Fi.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Connecting to a Printer  
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer  
(supporting DPS over IP) to print them.  
* Wi-Fi is a brand name that indicates interoperability certification of wireless  
LAN devices.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connecting to Web Services  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Images can be sent to social network services and other Web  
services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY*. Unsent images on  
the camera can also be sent automatically to a computer or  
Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.  
* CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is an online photo service available to  
those who have purchased this product.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Connecting to a Smartphone  
Playback Mode  
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that  
have Wi-Fi functions. You can also geotag your shots from a  
connected smartphone or tablet.  
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and  
other compatible devices are collectively referred to as  
“smartphones”.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Connecting to Another Camera  
Use the Wi-Fi function to send images between Canon-brand,  
compact digital cameras.  
Index  
125  
 
Cover  
Sending Images to a Smartphone  
Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi  
Before Use  
Sending images via Wi-Fi requires some initial preparation on the camera  
and target devices. Preparations and methods of sending images vary  
depending on the destination.  
Note that before using Wi-Fi (=133), you will need to register a camera  
nickname on the camera.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Internet  
CameraWindow  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera  
Smartphone  
Tablet computer  
Access point  
Camera Basics  
Uploading Images to Web Services  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Install CameraWindow on a smartphone (=130)  
Connect directly (=139) or via an access point (=134)  
Send images (=142)  
SNS, video-  
CANON iMAGE  
sharing sites,  
GATEWAY  
e-mail  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Sending Images to Another Camera  
Access point  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Camera  
Computer or smartphone  
Playback Mode  
browsers  
Camera  
Camera  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Register Web services (=127)  
Connect to another camera (=141)  
Connect via an access point (=134)  
Send images (=142)*  
Send images (=142)  
Setting Menu  
* You can send images to a computer or Web service (=145).  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
126  
   
Cover  
Sending Images to a Computer  
Registering Web Services  
Before Use  
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you  
want to use.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Internet  
CameraWindow  
A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is  
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and  
other Web services.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Access point  
Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser  
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and  
version information.  
Camera  
Computer  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Check your computer environment (=131)  
Install CameraWindow on a computer (=131)  
For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Configure the computer for a Wi-Fi connection (Windows only, =133)  
Connect via an access point (=134)  
P Mode  
You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the  
websites for each Web service you want to register.  
Save images to a computer (=144)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Printing Images Wirelessly  
Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Camera  
Printer  
Access point  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Connect directly (=139) or via an access point (=134)  
9
10  
Print images (=176)  
Appendix  
Index  
127  
   
Cover  
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY  
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.  
4 Choose [ ].  
Before Use  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
Common Camera  
Operations  
turn the <7> dial to choose [  
then press the <m> button.  
], and  
Basic Guide  
1 Log in to CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY and access the  
camera settings page.  
zzFrom a computer or smartphone, access  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site for your  
region.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 Establish a connection with the  
access point.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Authenticate], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzAccess the camera settings page.  
zzOnce the login screen is displayed,  
enter your user name and password  
to log in. If you do not have a CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow  
the instructions to complete member  
registration (free of charge).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
6 Choose an access point.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose a network (access  
point), and then press the <m> button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
2 Choose your camera model.  
Setting Menu  
zzOn this camera model, [  
] is displayed  
in the Wi-Fi menu.  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzOnce you choose the model, a page is  
displayed for entering the authentication  
code. On this page in step 9, you will  
enter the authentication code displayed  
on the camera after steps 3 – 8.  
Appendix  
Index  
3 Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
zzOn the camera, access the Wi-Fi menu  
(=133).  
128  
   
Cover  
7 Enter the access point  
password.  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
keyboard, and then enter the password  
(=135).  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Next], and then  
press the <m> button.  
10 Check the confirmation  
numbers and complete the  
setup process.  
zzMake sure the confirmation number on  
the camera matches the number on the  
smartphone or computer.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8 Choose [Auto] and establish the  
connection.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Auto], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzComplete the setup process on the  
smartphone or computer.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zz[ ] (=145) and CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY are now added as  
zzOnce the camera is connected to CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,  
an authentication code is displayed.  
Playback Mode  
destinations, and the [  
to [ ].  
] icon changes  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzA message is displayed on the  
smartphone or computer to indicate that  
this process is finished. To add other  
Web services, follow the procedure  
in “Registering Other Web Services”  
(=130) from step 2.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
9 Enter the authentication code.  
zzOn the smartphone or computer, enter  
the authentication code displayed on the  
camera and go to the next step.  
zzA six-digit confirmation number is  
displayed.  
Index  
You can connect to WPS-compatible access points by choosing [WPS  
Connection] in step 6. For details, see steps 6 – 8 in “Connecting to WPS-  
Compatible Access Points” (=136).  
129  
Cover  
Registering Other Web Services  
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the  
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the  
camera first (=128).  
Installing CameraWindow on a  
Smartphone  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Before connecting your camera to a smartphone, first install the free  
dedicated application, CameraWindow, on your smartphone.  
Basic Guide  
1 Access the Web service  
settings screen.  
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then  
access the Web service settings screen.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Connect the smartphone to a  
network.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Install CameraWindow.  
zzFor an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch,  
download and install CameraWindow  
from the App Store.  
2 Configure the Web service you  
want to use.  
zzFollow the instructions displayed on the  
smartphone or computer to set up the  
Web service.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzFor an Android device, download and  
install CameraWindow from Google Play.  
zzAfter installation, use the camera  
to establish a connection with the  
smartphone (=134, 139).  
Playback Mode  
3 Choose [ ].  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzAccess the Wi-Fi menu (=133), choose  
[
] (either press the <o><p><q><r>  
Setting Menu  
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then  
press the <m> button.  
For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions),  
refer to the Canon website.  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzThe Web service settings are now  
updated.  
Appendix  
Index  
If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the  
camera settings.  
130  
       
Cover  
Installing the Software  
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.  
Preparing to Register a Computer  
Prepare to register a computer. To save images to the computer wirelessly,  
you must install CameraWindow.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
What you will need:  
zzComputer  
zzUSB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*  
* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a  
cable, some features will not be added.  
Basic Guide  
Checking Your Computer Environment  
Advanced Guide  
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following  
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility  
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon  
website.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Download the software.  
zzWith a computer connected to the  
Windows  
Macintosh  
Mac OS X 10.6.8  
Mac OS X 10.7  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Operating  
System  
Windows 8  
Windows 7 SP1  
P Mode  
Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later  
zzAccess the site for your country or region.  
zzDownload the software.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.  
Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)  
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media  
Feature Pack.  
For details, check the following website.  
2 Begin the installation.  
zzClick [Easy Installation] and follow the  
on-screen instructions to complete the  
installation process.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
131  
       
Cover  
4 Install the files.  
3 When a message is displayed  
prompting you to connect the  
camera, choose whether to  
connect or not.  
Before Use  
zzInstallation may take some time,  
depending on computer performance and  
the Internet connection.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
When Connecting the Camera to  
the Computer  
zzWith the camera turned off, open the  
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the  
USB cable in the orientation shown,  
insert the plug fully into the camera  
terminal ( ).  
zzClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen  
after installation.  
Advanced Guide  
zzAfter installation when the camera is  
connected to the computer, turn the  
camera off before disconnecting the  
cable.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Using the software, you can update to the latest version, and download new  
functions via the Internet (some software excluded).  
The first time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will be installed,  
so it may take a few minutes until camera images are accessible.  
Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera  
model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to  
its latest version of the software.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable  
in the computer’s USB port. For details  
about USB connections on the computer,  
refer to the computer user manual.  
zzTurn the camera on, and follow the  
on-screen instructions to complete the  
installation process.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Without Connecting the Camera  
zzSelect [Install without connecting  
the device] and follow the on-screen  
instructions to complete the installation  
process.  
Index  
132  
Cover  
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi  
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu  
Before Use  
Connection (Windows Only)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before  
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.  
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi  
To start with, register a camera nickname.  
Basic Guide  
This nickname will be displayed on the screen of target devices when  
connecting to other devices via Wi-Fi.  
1 Confirm that the computer is  
connected to the access point.  
zzFor instructions on checking your network  
connection, refer to the computer user  
manual.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the < > button.  
zzClick in the following order: [Start] menu  
P Mode  
[All Programs]  
[Canon Utilities]  
2 Enter a nickname.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
[CameraWindow]  
setup].  
[Wi-Fi connection  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
keyboard, and then enter a nickname  
(=26).  
Playback Mode  
zzIn the application that opens, follow the  
on-screen instructions and configure the  
setting.  
zzUp to 16 characters can be used.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in  
step 2.  
Accessories  
9
10  
- Turn on media streaming.  
zzThe Wi-Fi menu is displayed.  
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi.  
- Turn on network discovery.  
Appendix  
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.  
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).  
This allows you to check the network connection status.  
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).  
Index  
This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically.  
Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as  
described here. Check the settings of your security software.  
133  
         
Cover  
Connecting via an Access Point  
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.  
Also refer to the access point user manual.  
When connecting wirelessly to any device other than a computer, a memory  
card must be inserted in the camera. Additionally, the memory card must  
contain images in order for you to access Web services or connect to a  
smartphone or printer wirelessly.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
To change the camera’s nickname, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab, and  
then choose [Change Device Nickname].  
Nicknames beginning with a space cannot be entered in step 2. If you attempt  
to do this and press the <n> button on the keyboard screen, a message  
will be displayed. Press the <m> button to access the keyboard, and then  
enter a new nickname.  
Basic Guide  
Confirming Access Point Compatibility  
Advanced Guide  
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi  
If you are already using Wi-Fi, confirm the following items. For instructions  
on checking network settings, refer to the access point user manual.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection  
If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings,  
contact the system administrator for details.  
These settings are very important for network security. Exercise  
adequate caution when changing these settings.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Once you have connected to devices via Wi-Fi, recent destinations will  
P Mode  
be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the <  
>
button. You can easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons  
to choose the device name and then pressing the <m> button.  
To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the  
<q><r> buttons, and then configure the setting.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, press the <n> button,  
and on the [3] tab, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
134  
     
Cover  
Check sheet  
Before Use  
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points  
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over  
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method  
for settings on a WPS supported device.  
Network name (SSID/ESSID)  
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use.  
Also called the “access point name” or “network name”.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
○ None  
○ WEP (open system  
authentication)  
○ WPA-PSK (TKIP)  
Advanced Guide  
Network authentication / data encryption (encryption  
method / encryption mode)  
1 Confirm that the target device is  
connected to the access point.  
zzThis step is not required when connecting  
to Web services.  
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. ○ WPA-PSK (AES)  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
○ WPA2-PSK (TKIP)  
○ WPA2-PSK (AES)  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Password (encryption key / network key)  
The key used when encrypting data during wireless  
transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network  
key”.  
zzFor instructions on checking the  
connection, refer to the device and  
access point user manuals.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Key index (transmit key)  
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / ○ 1  
data encryption.  
(=133).  
Playback Mode  
3 Choose the target device.  
zzChoose the target device (either press  
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports  
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) or not. Refer to the user manual provided with  
your access point to check if it supports WPS.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting  
multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a  
“Wi-Fi router”.  
This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.  
If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the  
camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s  
MAC address by choosing the [3] tab, [Wi-Fi Settings], and then [Check MAC  
Address].  
zzTo connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].  
zzTo connect to a computer, choose [ ].  
zzTo connect to a printer, choose [2].  
zzTo connect to a Web service, choose  
the service icon. If multiple recipients  
or sharing options are used with a Web  
service, choose the desired item on the  
[Select Recipient] screen (either press  
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>  
dial), and then press the <m> button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
135  
     
Cover  
4 Choose [Add a Device].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and  
then press the <m> button.  
8 Establish the connection.  
zzOn the access point, hold down the WPS  
connection button for a few seconds.  
zzOn the camera, press the <m> button.  
zzThe camera will connect to the access  
point.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzIf you have selected [ ], [2], or [ ] in  
step 3, devices connected to the access  
point are listed on the [Select a Device]  
screen displayed next.  
5 To connect to a smartphone or  
printer:  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Choose [Switch Network].  
zzWhen the [Waiting to connect] screen  
is displayed (=139), choose [Switch  
Network] (either press the <q><r>  
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzIf you have selected a Web service in  
step 3, go to step 11.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
9 To connect to a smartphone,  
printer, or computer:  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Choose the target device.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose the computer name,  
and then press the <m> button.  
zzIf you have selected a smartphone,  
printer, or Macintosh computer, go to  
step 11.  
6 Choose [WPS Connection].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [WPS Connection],  
and then press the <m> button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
7 Choose [PBC Method].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [PBC Method], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Index  
136  
       
Cover  
11 Send or print the images.  
zzThe screen displayed when the devices  
are connected varies depending on the  
target device.  
10 If you have selected a computer  
running Windows in step 9 for  
the first time:  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Install a driver.  
Basic Guide  
zzWhen the screen at left is displayed on  
the camera, click the Start menu on the  
computer, click [Control Panel], and then  
click [Add a device].  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
smartphone or Web service, an image  
transfer screen is displayed. For  
instructions on sending images, see  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
computer, the camera screen is blank.  
the computer.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzDouble-click the connected camera icon.  
zzDriver installation will begin.  
zzAfter driver installation is complete, and  
the camera and computer connection  
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be  
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera screen.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
printer, you can print by following the  
same steps as for printing via USB. For  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
If you chose [PIN Method] in step 7, a PIN code will be displayed on the  
screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the  
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included  
with your access point.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
To add multiple destinations, repeat this procedure from the first step.  
Appendix  
Index  
137  
 
Cover  
3 Enter the access point  
password.  
zzPress the <m> button to access the  
keyboard, and then enter the password  
(=135).  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Next], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Before Use  
Previous Access Points  
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following  
step 4 in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=136).  
Common Camera  
Operations  
To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is already  
connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 9. Note that this  
step is not required when connecting to Web services.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen  
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the  
procedure from step 6.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 Choose [Auto].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Auto], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Connecting to Access Points in the List  
zzIf you selected [ ], [2], or [ ] as the  
target device, see “Connecting to WPS-  
Compatible Access Points”, starting with  
step 9 (=136).  
zzIf you selected a Web service as the  
destination, see “Connecting to WPS-  
Compatible Access Points”, starting with  
step 11 (=137).  
P Mode  
1 View the listed access points.  
zzView the listed networks (access  
points) as described in steps 1 – 5 of  
“Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access  
Points” (=135 136).  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
2 Choose an access point.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose a network (access  
point), and then press the <m> button.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or  
refer to the user manual.  
9
10  
Appendix  
Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected,  
choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to manually set an access point. Follow on-  
screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.  
When you use an access point that you have already connected to for  
connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To  
use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the <o><p> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial) and press the <m> button.  
Index  
138  
Cover  
Connecting without an Access Point  
When connecting to a smartphone or printer via Wi-Fi, you can use the  
camera as an access point (Camera Access Point mode) instead of using  
another access point.  
Similarly, no access point is used in camera-to-camera connections  
(=141).  
4 On the target device, connect  
to the network identified on the  
camera.  
zzIn the smartphone or printer’s Wi-Fi  
setting menu, choose the SSID (network  
name) displayed on the camera.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
5 For a smartphone connection:  
Start CameraWindow on the  
smartphone.  
zzThe first time CameraWindow starts  
up, register a smartphone nickname for  
display on the camera.  
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(=133).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Choose the target device.  
zzChoose the target device (either press  
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzOnce the smartphone is recognized on  
the camera, the device connection screen  
will be displayed on the camera.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzTo connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].  
zzTo connect to a printer, choose [2].  
6 Choose the target device.  
zzChoose the target device name (either  
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Playback Mode  
3 Choose [Add a Device].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzThe camera’s SSID is displayed.  
Index  
139  
       
Cover  
7 For a smartphone connection:  
Adjust the privacy setting.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press  
the <m> button.  
To add multiple devices, repeat this procedure from the first step.  
For better security, you can require password input on the screen in step 3  
by accessing MENU and choosing [3] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password]  
► [On]. In this case, in the password field on the device in step 4, enter the  
password displayed on the camera.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
zzYou can now use the smartphone to  
receive images sent from the camera,  
or to geotag images on the camera  
(=146).  
Advanced Guide  
Previous Access Points  
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following  
step 3 in “Connecting without an Access Point” (=139).  
To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the  
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Set  
Camera As Access Point].  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
8 Send or print the images.  
zzThe screen displayed when the devices  
are connected varies depending on the  
target device.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
When reconnecting via a previous access point, connect the target  
device to the access point in step 4.  
P Mode  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
smartphone, an image transfer screen  
is displayed. For instructions on sending  
zzWhen the camera is connected to a  
printer, you can print by following the  
same steps as for printing via USB. For  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen  
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the  
procedure in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” from step 6  
(=136).  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected  
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 7. To keep camera  
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone,  
choose [No] in step 7.  
Appendix  
Index  
To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list,  
choose the smartphone whose settings you want to change from  
[Edit a Device] in step 3, and then choose [View Settings].  
140  
 
Cover  
Connecting to Another Camera  
zzWhen the target camera has been added  
successfully, the image transfer screen  
will be displayed. Proceed to “Sending  
Images” (=142).  
Before Use  
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected  
to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-Fi cards cannot  
be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to  
PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS  
cameras with this camera.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
To add multiple cameras, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1.  
Once a camera is added, the camera name will be displayed on the screen in  
step 3. To connect to a camera again, simply choose the camera name from  
the list.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu  
(=133).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose camera.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose [4], and  
then press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
3 Choose [Add a Device].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and  
then press the <m> button.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera  
too.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
zzCamera connection information will be  
added when [Start connection on target  
camera] is displayed on both camera  
screens.  
141  
   
Cover  
Sending Images  
Send images wirelessly to destinations registered on the camera as follows.  
Note that when images are sent to a computer, the computer is used  
instead of the camera (=144).  
For movies that you do not compress (=123), a separate,  
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this  
may delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is  
enough space for it on the memory card.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area (=4).  
Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers.  
Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long  
time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level.  
When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality  
varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user  
manual.  
To disconnect from the camera, press the <n> button, choose [OK] on  
the confirmation screen (either press the <q><r> buttons or turn the <7>  
dial), and then press the <m> button. You can also use the smartphone to  
end the connection.  
Sending Images Individually  
Advanced Guide  
1 Choose an image.  
zzTurn the <7> dial to choose an image  
to send.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Send the image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose  
[Send this image], and then press the  
<m> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons.  
zzWhen uploading to YouTube, read the  
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and  
press the <m> button.  
zzImage transfer will begin. The screen  
darkens during image transfer.  
zzAfter images are uploaded to a Web  
service, [OK] is displayed. Press the  
<m> button to return to the playback  
screen.  
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak  
Playback Mode  
Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images  
you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)  
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p>  
buttons, and then press the <m> button. On the next screen, choose the  
resolution by pressing the <o><p> buttons, and then press the <m>  
button.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzAfter sending images to a camera or  
smartphone, [Transfer completed] will be  
displayed, and the display will return to  
the image transfer screen.  
To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.  
Index  
Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected  
size before sending.  
Movies cannot be resized.  
142  
         
Cover  
Sending Multiple Images  
Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be sent.  
Movies up to five minutes (or digest movies up to 13 minutes) can be sent.  
Web services may limit the number of images you can send. For details, refer  
to the Web service you are using.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
1 Choose [Select and send].  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose  
[Select and send], and then press the  
<m> button.  
You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward  
<k> to access single-image display and then pressing the <q><r> buttons or  
turning the <7> dial.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
In step 3, you can choose the desired resolution (size) of your images before  
sending (=45).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Adding Comments  
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to  
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters  
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.  
2 Choose images.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to  
choose an image to send, and then press  
the <m> button. [ ] is displayed.  
zzTo cancel selection, press the <m>  
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.  
zzRepeat this process to choose additional  
images.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
1 Access the screen for adding  
comments.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons to  
choose [ ], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Playback Mode  
zzAfter you finish choosing images, press  
the <n> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
3 Send the images.  
2 Add a comment (=26).  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Send], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
3 Send the image.  
Appendix  
Index  
When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY is automatically sent.  
143  
Cover  
Saving Images to a Computer  
When sending images to a computer, use the computer instead of the  
camera.  
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.  
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some  
software excluded).  
Movies will take longer to import since the file size is larger than still images.  
To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.  
You can also specify to save all images or only selected images to the  
computer, and you can change the destination folder. Refer to “Software  
Instruction Manual” (=173) for details.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the  
taskbar.  
Advanced Guide  
If CameraWindow is not displayed when using a Macintosh computer, click the  
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.  
Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your  
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations  
apply.  
1 Display CameraWindow.  
zzIn Windows, access CameraWindow by  
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon  
Camera].  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until  
camera images are accessible.  
zzOn a Macintosh computer,  
CameraWindow is automatically  
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is  
established between the camera and  
computer.  
P Mode  
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.  
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be  
saved.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.  
Playback Mode  
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,  
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image  
file sizes.  
2 Import images.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and  
then click [Import Untransferred Images].  
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures  
folder on the computer, in separate  
folders named by date.  
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as  
movie editing.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed  
after image import is complete. For  
instructions on viewing images on a  
computer, refer to “Software Instruction  
Manual” (=173).  
Appendix  
Index  
144  
   
Cover  
3 Choose the type of images  
to send (only when sending  
movies with images).  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab  
(=25).  
Sending Images Automatically  
(Image Sync)  
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be  
sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.  
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[Image Sync], and then press the  
<q><r> buttons to choose [Stills/  
Movies].  
Advanced Guide  
Initial Preparations  
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
To choose a Web service as the destination, follow the steps in “Registering  
Other Web Services” (=130) to update the camera settings.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 Install the software.  
zzInstall the software on a computer  
connected to the Internet (=131).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
2 Register the camera.  
zzWindows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],  
and then click [Add new camera].  
Playback Mode  
zzMacintosh: In the menu bar, click [ ],  
and then click [Add new camera].  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzChoose a source camera from one of  
the cameras listed, which are linked to  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (=128).  
zzOnce the camera is registered and ready  
to receive images, the icon changes to  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
[
].  
Index  
145  
   
Cover  
Sending Images  
Geotagging Images on the Camera  
Before Use  
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.  
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images  
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored  
images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and  
save the images.  
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow  
application (=130) can be added to images on the camera. Images are  
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time  
Additionally, in [Time Zone] (=151), specify any shooting  
destinations that are in other time zones.  
The smartphone you will use for geotagging must be authorized to  
view the images on the camera (=140).  
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data  
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing  
these images with others, as when posting images online where  
many others can view them.  
Advanced Guide  
choose [ ].  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzOnce the connection is established, the  
images are sent.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzWhen the images have been sent  
successfully to the CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY server, [ ] is displayed on  
the screen.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzImages are automatically saved to the  
computer when you turn it on.  
zzImages are automatically sent to Web  
services from the CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY server, even if the computer  
is off.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack  
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =160).  
Appendix  
Index  
Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any  
images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to  
the computer.  
Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as  
the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of CANON  
iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to  
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Internet.  
146  
   
Cover  
5 Choose an item to edit.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an item to edit, and  
then press the <m> button.  
zzThe items you can change depend on  
what device or service the camera will  
access.  
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings  
Before Use  
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Editing Connection Information  
Basic Guide  
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu  
Advanced Guide  
(=133).  
Connection  
Web  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose a device to edit.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons  
or turn the <7> dial to choose the icon  
of the device to edit, and then press the  
<m> button.  
Configurable Items  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
4
c
Services  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
O
O
O
O
O
O
[Change Device Nickname] (=147)  
[View Settings] (=140)  
P Mode  
O
O
O
[Erase Connection Info] (=148)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
O
: Configurable : Not configurable  
3 Choose [Edit a Device].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Edit a Device], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Playback Mode  
Changing a Device Nickname  
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on  
the camera.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
zzFollowing step 5 in “Editing Connection  
Information” (=147), choose [Change  
Device Nickname] and press the <m>  
button.  
9
10  
4 Choose a device to edit.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose the device to edit,  
and then press the <m> button.  
Appendix  
Index  
zzSelect the input field and press the <m>  
button. Use the keyboard displayed to  
enter a new nickname (=26).  
147  
       
Cover  
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default  
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera  
to another person, or dispose of it.  
Before Use  
Erasing Connection Information  
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have  
connected to) as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab  
(=25).  
zzFollowing step 5 in “Editing Connection  
Information” (=147), choose [Erase  
Connection Info] and press the <m>  
button.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to  
choose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose [Reset Settings].  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Reset Settings], and  
then press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
zzThe connection information will be  
erased.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
3 Restore the default settings.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzThe Wi-Fi settings are now reset.  
Index  
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure  
that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.  
To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] in the  
[3] tab (=157).  
148  
   
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
8
Basic Guide  
Setting Menu  
Advanced Guide  
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Using Eco Mode..................................................152  
Power-Saving Adjustment...................................152  
Screen Brightness...............................................153  
Start-Up Screen ..................................................153  
Formatting Memory Cards ..................................153  
File Numbering....................................................154  
Date-Based Image Storage.................................155  
Metric / Non-Metric Display.................................155  
Electronic Level Calibration.................................155  
Setting Copyright Information to Record in  
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions.............. 150  
Silencing Camera Operations .............................150  
Adjusting the Volume ..........................................150  
Customizing Sounds ...........................................150  
Hiding Hints and Tips ..........................................151  
Date and Time.....................................................151  
World Clock.........................................................151  
Lens Retraction Timing .......................................152  
Playback Mode  
Images ................................................................156  
Checking Certification Logos ..............................156  
Display Language ...............................................157  
Adjusting Other Settings .....................................157  
Restoring Defaults...............................................157  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
149  
 
Cover  
Adjusting the Volume  
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.  
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions  
Before Use  
Functions can be configured on the [3] tab. Customize commonly used  
Common Camera  
Operations  
functions as desired, for greater convenience (=25).  
zzChoose [Volume], and then press the  
<m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Silencing Camera Operations  
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.  
zzChoose an item, and then press the  
<q><r> buttons to adjust the volume.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzChoose [Mute], and then choose [On].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Customizing Sounds  
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzChoose [Sound Options], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzChoose an item, and then press the  
<q><r> buttons to choose an option.  
Operation can also be silenced by holding down the <p> button as you turn  
the camera on.  
Sound is not played during movies (=102) if you mute camera sounds. To  
restore sound during movies, press the <o> button. Adjust volume with the  
<o><p> buttons, as needed.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode (=31) cannot  
Appendix  
be changed.  
Index  
150  
       
Cover  
Hiding Hints and Tips  
World Clock  
Before Use  
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (=24) or  
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you  
travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that  
time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/  
Time setting manually.  
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your  
Common Camera  
Operations  
MENU (=25) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.  
Basic Guide  
zzChoose [Hints & Tips], and then choose  
[Off].  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Specify your destination.  
zzChoose [Time Zone], and then press the  
<m> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ World], and then  
press the <m> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose the destination.  
zzTo set daylight saving time (1 hour  
ahead), press the <o><p> buttons to  
choose [ ].  
Date and Time  
Adjust the date and time as follows.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
zzChoose [Date/Time], and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons to choose an  
option, and then adjust the setting, either  
by pressing the <o><p> buttons or  
turning the <7> dial.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Setting Menu  
2 Switch to the destination time  
zone.  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [ World], and then  
press the <n> button.  
zz[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen  
(=191).  
Appendix  
Index  
Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (=15) will automatically  
update your [  
Home] time and date.  
151  
       
Cover  
2 Shoot.  
Lens Retraction Timing  
Before Use  
zzTo activate the screen and prepare for  
shooting when the screen is off but the  
lens is still out, press the shutter button  
halfway.  
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press  
the <1> button in Shooting mode (=21). To have the lens retracted  
immediately after you press the <1> button, set the retraction timing to  
[0 sec.].  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Power-Saving Adjustment  
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power  
Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (=21).  
zzChoose [Lens Retract], and then choose  
[0 sec.].  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzChoose [Power Saving], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzAfter choosing an item, press the  
<q><r> buttons to adjust it as needed.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Using Eco Mode  
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When  
the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery  
consumption.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for  
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].  
Setting Menu  
1 Configure the setting.  
zzChoose [Eco Mode], and then choose  
[On].  
The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off].  
These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode  
(=152) to [On].  
Accessories  
9
10  
zz[ ] is now shown on the shooting  
screen (=191).  
Appendix  
Index  
zzThe screen darkens when the camera  
is not used for approximately two  
seconds; approximately ten seconds  
after darkening, the screen turns off.  
The camera turns off after approximately  
three minutes of inactivity.  
152  
       
Cover  
Screen Brightness  
Formatting Memory Cards  
Before Use  
Adjust screen brightness as follows.  
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you  
should format the card with this camera.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images  
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.  
zzChoose [LCD Brightness], and then  
press the <q><r> buttons to adjust the  
brightness.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
1 Access the [Format] screen.  
zzChoose [Format], and then press the  
<m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
2 Choose [OK].  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
For maximum brightness, press and hold the <p> button for at least one  
second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display.  
(This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [3] tab.) To restore  
the original brightness, press and hold the <p> button again for at least one  
second or restart the camera.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the  
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),  
and then press the <m> button.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Start-Up Screen  
3 Format the memory card.  
zzTo begin the formatting process, press  
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>  
dial to choose [OK], and then press the  
<m> button.  
zzWhen formatting is finished, [Memory  
card formatting complete] is displayed.  
Press the <m> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as  
follows.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
zzChoose [Start-up Image], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an option.  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file  
management information on the card and does not erase the data  
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take  
steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically  
destroying cards.  
153  
       
Cover  
File Numbering  
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)  
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change  
how the camera assigns file numbers.  
The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than  
the advertised capacity.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Low-Level Formatting  
Basic Guide  
Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is  
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is  
slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops.  
Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level  
formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other  
steps to back them up.  
zzChoose [File Numbering], and then  
choose an option.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzOn the screen in step 1 of “Formatting  
Memory Cards” (=153), press the  
<o><p> buttons or turn the <7> dial  
to choose [Low Level Format], and then  
press the <q><r> buttons to select this  
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.  
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/  
saved) even if you switch memory cards.  
P Mode  
Continuous  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or  
when a new folder is created.  
Auto Reset  
Playback Mode  
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory  
Cards” (=153) to continue with the  
formatting process.  
Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered  
consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted  
memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted  
(=153)) memory card.  
Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (=173) for information on the card  
folder structure and image formats.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card.  
You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this  
case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
154  
     
Cover  
Date-Based Image Storage  
Electronic Level Calibration  
Before Use  
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the  
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.  
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the  
camera.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
zzChoose [Create Folder], and then choose  
[Daily].  
1 Make sure the camera is level.  
zzPlace the camera on a flat surface, such  
as a table.  
Advanced Guide  
zzImages will now be saved in folders  
created on the shooting date.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Calibrate the electronic level.  
zzChoose [Electronic Level], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzTo adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal  
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/  
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch  
Calibration], followed by the <m> button.  
A confirmation message is displayed.  
zzChoose [OK], and then press the <m>  
button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Metric / Non-Metric Display  
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (=29), the MF  
indicator (=78), GPS information for elevation (=146), and elsewhere  
from m/cm to ft/in as needed.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzChoose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].  
Resetting the Electronic Level  
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is  
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzChoose [Electronic Level], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzChoose [Reset], and then press the  
<m> button.  
Index  
zzOnce the electronic level has been reset,  
the menu screen is displayed again.  
155  
     
Cover  
Setting Copyright Information to Record in  
Images  
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this  
information beforehand as follows.  
Before Use  
Deleting All Copyright Information  
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same  
time as follows.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Info].  
zzChoose [Copyright Info], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial to choose [Enter Author’s  
Name] or [Enter Copyright Details]. Press  
the <m> button to access the keyboard,  
and enter the name (=26).  
zzPress the <n> button. When [Accept  
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]  
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>  
button.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Checking Certification Logos  
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed  
on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the  
camera packaging, or on the camera body.  
Playback Mode  
zzThe information set here will now be  
recorded in images.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the  
screen above, and then press the <m> button.  
You can also use the software (=173) to enter, change, and delete copyright  
information. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the  
camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.  
zzChoose [Certification Logo Display], and  
then press the <m> button.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
You can check copyright information recorded in images by using the software,  
once you save the images to a computer.  
156  
   
Cover  
Display Language  
Restoring Defaults  
Before Use  
Change the display language as needed.  
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera  
settings.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzChoose [Language ], and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzPress the <o><p><q><r> buttons or  
turn the <7> dial to choose a language,  
and then press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.  
zzChoose [Reset All], and then press the  
<m> button.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Restore default settings.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and  
holding the <m> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.  
zzDefault settings are now restored.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Adjusting Other Settings  
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [3] tab.  
The following functions are not restored to default settings.  
- Information registered using Face ID (=39)  
- [3] tab settings [Date/Time] (=151), [Time Zone] (=151) [Language  
(=157), and [Video System] (=165)  
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (=74)  
- Shooting mode chosen in [K] (=52) or [ ] (=54) mode  
- Exposure compensation (=68) setting  
- Movie mode (=65)  
Playback Mode  
]
[Video System] (=165)  
[Ctrl via HDMI] (=164)  
[Wi-Fi Settings] (=124)  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
- Wi-Fi settings (=124)  
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (=155)  
- Copyright information (=156)  
Appendix  
Index  
157  
     
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
9
Basic Guide  
Accessories  
Advanced Guide  
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible  
accessories sold separately  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Using a Tele-Converter (Sold Separately)...........166  
Using a Lens Hood..............................................167  
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)...................167  
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)..........168  
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) .........169  
System Map .................................................... 159  
Optional Accessories..................................... 160  
Power Supplies ...................................................160  
Flash Units ..........................................................161  
Other Accessories...............................................162  
Printers................................................................162  
Using Optional Accessories.......................... 163  
Playback on a TV................................................163  
Powering the Camera with Household Power.....165  
Printing Images .............................................. 176  
Easy Print............................................................176  
Configuring Print Settings ...................................177  
Printing Movie Scenes ........................................179  
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)..............180  
Adding Images to a Photobook...........................182  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Using the Software......................................... 173  
Setting Menu  
Software..............................................................173  
Computer Connections via a Cable ....................174  
Saving Images to a Computer.............................174  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
158  
 
Cover  
System Map  
Before Use  
Flash Units  
Included Accessories  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Battery Pack  
NB-10L*1  
(with terminal cover)  
Battery Charger  
Speedlite*4  
600EX-RT, 600EX,  
580EX II, 430EX II,  
320EX, 270EX II  
Neck Strap  
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE*1  
High-Power  
Flash  
Macro Twin Lite  
MT-24EX*5*6  
Macro Ring Lite  
MR-14EX*6  
Advanced Guide  
HF-DC2*3  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cases  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Soft Case  
SC-DC85  
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2  
Waterproof Case  
WP-DC52  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Lens Accessories  
Power  
Memory Card  
Card Reader  
Windows/  
Macintosh  
Computer  
Playback Mode  
Tele-Converter  
TC-DC58E*6  
Canon-Brand Lens Filter  
(58 mm dia.)*7  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Cables  
AC Adapter Kit  
ACK-DC80  
Setting Menu  
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible Printers  
HDMI Cable HTC-100  
Accessories  
9
10  
TV/Video  
System  
Appendix  
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST  
Other Accessories  
Index  
Remote Switch RS-60E3  
159  
 
Cover  
*1Also available for purchase separately.  
*2A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).  
*3High-Power Flash HF-DC1 also supported.  
*4These accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and  
220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-Camera  
Shoe Cord OC-E3.  
*5Requires Bracket BKT-DC1 and Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.  
*6Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L.  
*7Requires Filter Adapter FA-DC58D.  
Optional Accessories  
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability  
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Power Supplies  
Advanced Guide  
Battery Pack NB-10L  
zzRechargeable lithium-ion battery  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine  
Canon accessories.  
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE  
zzCharger for Battery Pack NB-10L  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire,  
etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage  
and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to  
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you  
may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.  
P Mode  
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80  
zzFor powering the camera using  
household power. Recommended when  
using the camera over extended periods,  
or when connecting the camera to a  
printer or computer. Cannot be used to  
charge the battery pack in the camera.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be  
available.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with  
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).  
For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available  
adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed  
for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
160  
     
Cover  
Flash Units  
Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX  
Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX  
zzExternal macro flash unit that enables  
many styles of macro flash photography.  
Requires Conversion Lens Adapter  
LA-DC58L, Off-Camera Shoe Cord  
OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold  
separately) for attachment to the camera.  
Requires Conversion Lens Adapter  
LA-DC58L (sold separately) for  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
High-Power Flash HF-DC2  
zzExternal flash for illuminating subjects  
that are out of range of the built-in flash.  
High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be  
used.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Speedlite 600EX-RT, 600EX,  
580EX II, 430EX II, 320EX, 270EX II  
zzShoe-mounted flash unit that enables  
many styles of flash photography.  
Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and  
220EX are also supported.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
attachment to the camera.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3  
zzUsed to attach a Macro Twin Lite flash to  
the camera.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2  
zzPrevents unnatural shadows next to  
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes  
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.  
Playback Mode  
Bracket BKT-DC1  
zzUsed to attach a Macro Twin Lite flash to  
the camera.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2  
zzEnables wireless control of slave  
Speedlite flash units (except Speedlite  
220EX/270EX).  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
161  
Cover  
Other Accessories  
Conversion Lens Adapter  
LA-DC58L  
zzAdapter required to attach the Tele-  
converter or Macro Ring Lite/Macro Twin  
Lite flash to the camera.  
Before Use  
Soft Case SC-DC85  
zzProtects the camera from dust and  
scratches.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Handle with care to prevent leather  
discoloration.  
Advanced Guide  
Remote Switch RS-60E3  
zzEnables remote shutter button operation  
(pressing the button halfway or all the  
way down).  
Waterproof Case WP-DC52  
zzFor underwater photography at depths of  
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for  
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on  
ski slopes.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Filter Adapter FA-DC58D  
zzAdapter required when mounting a 58  
mm filter.  
P Mode  
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU  
zzFor connecting the camera to a computer  
or printer.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Canon Lens Filter (58 mm dia.)  
zzProtects the lens and enables a variety of  
shooting effects.  
Playback Mode  
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST  
zzConnect the camera to a TV to enjoy  
playback on the larger TV screen.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Printers  
Setting Menu  
Canon-Brand PictBridge-  
Compatible Printers  
zzPrinting images without a computer is  
possible by connecting the camera to  
a Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible  
printer.  
Accessories  
9
10  
HDMI Cable HTC-100  
zzFor connecting the camera to an HDMI  
input of a high-definition TV.  
Appendix  
Index  
For details, visit your nearest Canon  
retailer.  
Tele-Converter TC-DC58E  
zzOptional lens attached to the camera to  
increase the focal length by a factor of  
approximately 1.4x.  
162  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Movies  
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover  
and insert the cable plug fully into the  
camera terminal.  
Before Use  
Using Optional Accessories  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Still Images  
Basic Guide  
Playback on a TV  
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger  
screen of the TV.  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.  
3 Turn the TV on and switch to  
video input.  
zzSwitch the TV input to the video input you  
connected the cable to in step 2.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Some information may not be displayed on the TV (=192).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Movies  
P Mode  
4 Turn the camera on.  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback on a High-Definition TV  
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold  
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.  
Movies shot at a resolution of [  
in high definition.  
Playback Mode  
zzImages from the camera are now  
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is  
displayed on the camera screen.)  
zzWhen finished, turn off the camera and  
TV before disconnecting the cable.  
], [  
], or [  
] can be viewed  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
1 Make sure the camera and TV  
are off.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an  
2 Connect the camera to the TV.  
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into  
the HDMI input as shown.  
Appendix  
HDTV.  
Index  
163  
       
Cover  
4 Control the camera with the TV  
remote.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons on the remote  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote  
to browse images.  
Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback  
(including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control.  
Depending on the TV, you may need to adjust some TV settings. For  
details, refer to the TV manual.  
zzTo display the camera control panel,  
press the OK/Select button. Select  
control panel options by pressing the  
<q><r> buttons to choose an option,  
and then pressing the OK/Select button  
again.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Configure the setting.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Ctrl via HDMI] on the [3] tab, and then  
choose [Enable] (=25).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV  
2 Connect the camera to the TV.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Playback on a  
High-Definition TV” (=163) to connect  
the camera to the TV.  
Return  
Closes the menu.  
P Mode  
Displays sets of images, either from continuous shooting  
(=76) in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode (=67, 92,  
or 93) or individual still images saved as source data in  
] mode (=63). (Only displayed when a grouped  
image is selected.)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Group Playback  
Playback Mode  
[
3 Display images.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzTurn on the TV. On the camera, press the  
<1> button.  
Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie  
is selected.)  
Play Movie  
Slideshow  
Setting Menu  
zzImages from the camera are now  
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is  
displayed on the camera screen.)  
Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during  
playback, press the <q><r> buttons on the remote  
control.  
.
Accessories  
9
10  
Index Playback  
Change Display  
Displays multiple images in an index.  
Appendix  
Switches display modes (=103).  
l
Index  
Pressing buttons, such as the <n> button, on the camera will switch  
control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to  
single-image display.  
The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an  
HDMI CEC-compatible TV.  
164  
 
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output  
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the  
video output format, press the <n> button and choose [Video  
System] on the [3] tab.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Playback on a Standard-Definition TV  
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST  
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the  
TV as you control the camera.  
Basic Guide  
When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing  
shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when  
using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (=47), MF-Point  
Zoom (=79), MF Peaking (=79) and Night Display (=90) are not  
available.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Make sure the camera and TV  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
are off.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
White  
Red  
2 Connect the camera to the TV.  
Yellow  
Yellow  
zzOn the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
Movies  
the video inputs as shown.  
Powering the Camera with Household Power  
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately)  
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.  
P Mode  
Red  
White  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzOn the camera, open the terminal cover  
and insert the cable plug fully into the  
camera terminal.  
Playback Mode  
1 Make sure the camera is off.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
2 Connect the adapter to the  
coupler.  
Setting Menu  
zzInsert the adapter plug fully into the  
coupler.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
3 Insert the coupler.  
Index  
3 Display images.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Inserting the Battery  
Pack and Memory Card” (=13) to  
open the cover, and then insert the  
coupler as shown until it locks into place.  
zzFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a  
High-Definition TV” (=163) to display  
images.  
165  
       
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
zzLower the cover ( ), keeping the coupler  
cable in the coupler cable port ( ).  
zzSlide the cover ( ) until it clicks into  
place.  
Before Use  
Using a Tele-Converter (Sold Separately)  
Attaching Tele-converter TC-DC58E and Conversion Lens Adapter  
Common Camera  
Operations  
LA-DC58L (both sold separately) enables you to use a focal length of 1.4x.  
Basic Guide  
1 Remove the ring.  
Advanced Guide  
zzMake sure the camera is off.  
Camera Basics  
zzHold down the ring release button (  
and turn the ring in the direction of the  
arrow ( ).  
)
Coupler Cable Port  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
4 Connect the power cord.  
zzInsert one end of the power cord into the  
compact power adapter, and then plug  
the other end into a power outlet.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzAlign the mark on the ring with the  
mark on the camera, and then lift the  
ring off.  
P Mode  
zzTurn the camera on and use it as desired.  
zzWhen finished, turn the camera off and  
unplug the power cord from the outlet.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
2 Attach the conversion lens  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while  
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the  
camera.  
Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so  
could result in malfunction or damage to the product.  
adapter.  
Setting Menu  
zzAlign the mark on the conversion lens  
adapter with the mark on the camera,  
Accessories  
9
10  
and then turn the adapter in the direction  
of the arrows until it locks.  
Appendix  
zzTo remove the adapter, hold down the  
ring release button and turn the adapter  
in the opposite direction.  
Index  
166  
 
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
3 Attach the tele-converter lens.  
zzTurn the lens in the direction of the arrow  
to attach it securely to the camera.  
Before Use  
Using a Lens Hood  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Attaching the lens hood included with Tele-converter TC-DC58E (sold  
separately) can reduce the effect of extraneous light outside the angle of  
view when shooting backlit subjects, or when the camera is aimed toward a  
bright light source.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzFit the lens hood over the tele-converter  
as shown and attach it securely.  
zzWhen the lens hood will not be used,  
attach it inverted.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 Specify the converter in the  
camera settings.  
zzTurn the camera on.  
zzPress the <n> button and choose  
[Converter] on the [4] tab. Press the  
<q><r> buttons to choose [TC-DC58E].  
zzThere is no need to adjust the converter  
setting when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].  
zzAfter removing the converter, always  
return the converter setting to [None].  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in flash when the lens hood  
Playback Mode  
is attached.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Still Images  
Movies  
Setting Menu  
Vignetting may occur (especially in the lower right) when the built-in  
flash is used.  
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)  
Attaching a lens filter to the camera protects the lens and allows you to  
shoot with various effects. To attach a lens filter, you will need Filter Adapter  
FA-DC58D (sold separately).  
Accessories  
Set the camera to maximum telephoto when using the tele-  
converter. At other zoom positions, vignetting may occur.  
Use the LCD monitor to compose shots. The view through the  
viewfinder may be partially obstructed by vignetting.  
Before use, remove all dust or debris from the conversion lens with  
a lens blower brush.  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
1 Remove the ring.  
the ring.  
167  
Cover  
Still Images  
2 Attach the filter adapter.  
Before Use  
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)  
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake  
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This  
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.  
zzAlign the mark on the filter adapter with  
Common Camera  
Operations  
the mark on the camera, and then turn  
the adapter in the direction of the arrows  
until it locks in place.  
Basic Guide  
zzTo remove the adapter, turn off the  
camera, hold down the ring release  
button, and turn the adapter in the  
opposite direction.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Connect the remote switch.  
zzMake sure the camera is off.  
zzOpen the terminal cover and insert the  
remote switch plug.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
3 Attach a filter.  
zzAttach the filter to the camera in the  
direction of the arrow.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
We recommend the use of genuine Canon filters (58 mm dia.).  
When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option  
[Safety MF] to [On].  
If you use the built-in flash with the filter adapter attached, portions  
of the image may appear darker.  
When using the filter adapter, be sure to use only one filter at a time.  
Attaching multiple filters, or accessories such as a heavy lens, may  
cause the attachments to fall off and become damaged.  
Do not grip the filter adapter tightly.  
Playback Mode  
2 Shoot.  
zzTo shoot, press the release button on the  
remote switch.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Bulb photography (long exposures) is not supported.  
9
10  
Appendix  
Remove the filter adapter when not using a filter.  
Index  
The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the camera at the  
same time.  
168  
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
3 Choose shooting mode [G],  
[M], [B], or [D].  
zzFlash settings can only be configured in  
these modes. In other modes, the flash  
is adjusted and fired automatically, as  
needed.  
Before Use  
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)  
More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional Speedlite  
EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the optional  
Speedlite 320EX flash is available.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series functions.  
Wireless operation of the Speedlite 600EX-RT is not supported.  
Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not  
fire at all, in some cases.  
Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units) or  
flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and may  
damage the camera.  
4 Set the white balance to [h]  
(=74).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 Configure the external flash.  
zzPress the <n> button, choose [Flash  
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press  
the <m> button.  
zzOptions already set on the flash itself are  
displayed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional information.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial to choose an item, and  
then adjust the setting by pressing the  
<q><r> buttons.  
zzAvailable items vary depending on the  
shooting mode and the flash attached  
(=172).  
Still Images  
Movies  
Playback Mode  
Speedlite EX Series  
These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of  
flash photography needs.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
1 Attach the flash.  
Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a Speedlite EX series  
flash is attached, because that setting screen is no longer accessible.  
You can also access the setting screen by pressing the <r> button for at least  
one second.  
Flash settings in [ ] shooting mode can be configured just as they are in [G]  
mode.  
600EX-RT/580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the external flash  
has been set up for stroboscopic flash.  
320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie recording or  
in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.  
zzMake sure the camera is off, and then  
attach the flash unit to the hot shoe.  
Appendix  
Index  
2 Turn the flash on, and then turn  
the camera on.  
zzA red [h] icon is now displayed.  
zzThe flash pilot lamp will light up when the  
flash is ready.  
169  
   
Cover  
2 Remove the ring.  
Still Images  
Movies  
Before Use  
zzMake sure the camera is off.  
zzHold down the ring release button (  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)  
)
and turn the ring in the direction of the  
arrow ( ).  
zzUsing the optional Speedlite Bracket SB-  
E2 can help prevent unnatural shadows  
next to subjects during vertical shooting.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzAlign the  
mark on the ring with the  
mark on the camera, and then lift the  
ring off.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Still Images  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX  
3 Attach the back section of the  
This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography.  
Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L (sold separately) for  
attachment to the camera.  
P Mode  
conversion lens adapter.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzAlign the mark on the back section with  
the mark on the camera, and then turn  
Back  
Front  
Playback Mode  
the adapter in the direction of the arrows  
until it locks in place.  
Section Section  
1 Prepare the conversion lens  
adapter.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzTo remove the adapter, hold down the  
ring release button and turn the adapter  
in the opposite direction.  
zzRotate the conversion lens adapter in  
the direction indicated by the arrow to  
separate the front and back sections.  
zzOnly the back section is used to attach  
the Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX or Macro  
Twin Lite MT-24EX.  
Attach  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Detach  
9
10  
4 Attach the controller to the  
camera.  
zzAttach the control component of the  
macro ring lite to the hot shoe on top of  
the camera.  
Appendix  
Attach to camera  
Index  
170  
 
Cover  
5 Attach the flash unit to the  
conversion lens adapter.  
zzPress the release buttons on both sides  
of the macro ring lite in and attach the  
macro ring lite to the conversion lens  
adapter.  
Before Use  
Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX  
This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography.  
Requires the Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L, Off-Camera Shoe Cord  
OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold separately) for attachment to the  
camera.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
6 Choose shooting mode [G],  
[M], [B], or [D].  
1 Remove the ring and attach the  
back section of the conversion  
lens adapter.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 3 in “Macro Ring Lite  
MR-14EX” (=170) to remove the ring,  
and then attach the back section of the  
conversion lens adapter.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzFlash settings can only be configured in  
these modes. In other modes, the flash  
is adjusted and fired automatically, as  
needed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
7 Set the white balance to [h]  
(=74).  
2 Attach the off-camera shoe cord  
to the bracket.  
zzSlide the bracket screw to the outer end  
of the bracket. Align the bracket screw  
with the tripod socket of the off-camera  
shoe cord, and then tighten the screw to  
secure it.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
8 Enter [e] mode (=78).  
9 Set [ND Filter] to [On] (=73).  
10 Configure the external flash.  
zzFollow step 5 in “Speedlite EX Series”  
(=169) to adjust the settings.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
3 Attach the bracket to the  
camera.  
zzSlide the other bracket screw to the outer  
end of the bracket. Align the bracket  
screw with the tripod socket on the  
bottom of the camera, and then tighten  
the screw to secure it.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Keep cords (from the macro ring lite or the off-camera shoe cord)  
away from flash heads.  
When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the  
flash heads from coming into contact with the legs.  
Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot  
be used with these accessories attached.  
Appendix  
Index  
171  
 
Cover  
4 Attach the off-camera shoe cord  
to the camera.  
zzAttach the camera connection component  
of the off-camera shoe cord to the hot  
shoe on top of the camera.  
Keep cords (from the macro twin lite or the off-camera shoe cord)  
away from flash heads.  
When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the  
flash heads from coming into contact with the legs or bracket.  
Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot  
be used with these accessories attached.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Still Images  
5 Attach the controller to the off-  
camera shoe cord.  
zzAttach the controller for the macro twin  
lite to the flash connection component of  
the off-camera shoe cord.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
(Sold Separately)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
The following items are available in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode. In  
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] and [Red-Eye Lamp] can be  
configured. (With autoflash control, the flash always fires.) However, external  
flash units do not fire in modes that the built-in flash does not fire (=193).  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
6 Attach the flash unit to the  
conversion lens adapter.  
zzAttach each flash head to the respective  
mount ( ). Press the release button on  
the top of the ring in and attach the ring to  
the conversion lens adapter ( ).  
Shooting Mode  
Item  
Options  
G M B D  
Playback Mode  
Auto*1  
Manual*2  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flash Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Flash Exp. Comp*3  
Flash Output*4  
Shutter Sync.  
–3 to +3  
Setting Menu  
1/128*5 to 1/1 (in 1/3-stop increments)  
O
O
O
1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed  
Accessories  
9
10  
On  
Slow Synchro  
Appendix  
Off  
Wireless Func.*6  
Red-Eye Corr.  
Red-Eye Lamp  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On/Off  
On  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index  
7 Configure the external flash and  
settings on the camera.  
zzFollow steps 6 – 10 in “Macro Ring Lite  
MR-14EX” (=171) to configure the  
settings.  
Safety FE*7  
Off  
O
O
Clear Flash Settings*8  
172  
 
Cover  
*1E-TTL mode is used for the flash.  
*2M mode is used for the flash.  
In [D] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case, when  
the flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to the flash  
output level set on the camera.  
Using the Software  
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced  
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
*3Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure  
compensation set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure compensation  
on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the camera display will be  
updated accordingly.  
*4Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the flash  
unit.  
*51/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX, Macro Ring Lite  
MR-14EX, and Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX.  
*6For options other than On/Off, configure the setting on the flash unit itself. Not  
available with Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II/270EX, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX,  
or Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX. When this item is set to [On], [Shutter Sync.] cannot  
be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it will be changed to  
[1st-curtain].)  
Basic Guide  
Software  
Advanced Guide  
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you  
can do the following things on your computer.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
CameraWindow  
zzImport images and change camera settings  
ImageBrowser EX  
zzManage images: view, search, and organize  
zzPrint and edit images  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
*7Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].  
*8Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Slow Synchro], [Safety  
FE], [Red-Eye Corr.], and [Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] on the [3] tab on the  
camera (=157).  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Digital Photo Professional  
zzBrowse, process and edit RAW images  
Playback Mode  
Flash settings in [ ] shooting mode can be configured just as they are in [G]  
mode.  
Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and  
access fees must be paid separately.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
In [  
] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping, Babies  
Setting Menu  
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting scenes determined by  
the camera are not displayed, and the camera does not shoot continuously  
(=34).  
Software Instruction Manual  
Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can  
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
173  
         
Cover  
Computer Connections via a Cable  
Saving Images to a Computer  
Before Use  
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.  
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some  
software excluded).  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Checking Your Computer Environment  
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system  
requirements and compatibility information, including support in new  
operating systems, visit the Canon website.  
Basic Guide  
1 Connect the camera to the  
computer.  
zzWith the camera turned off, open the  
cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the  
USB cable in the orientation shown,  
insert the plug fully into the camera  
terminal ( ).  
Advanced Guide  
Windows  
Macintosh  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Windows 8  
Windows 7 SP1  
Windows Vista SP2  
Windows XP SP3  
Operating  
System*  
Mac OS X 10.6  
Mac OS X 10.7  
Mac OS X 10.8  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
*
When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including  
supported OS versions.  
zzInsert the larger plug of the USB cable  
in the computer’s USB port. For details  
about USB connections on the computer,  
refer to the computer user manual.  
Playback Mode  
Installing the Software  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
2 Turn the camera on to access  
CameraWindow.  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzOn a Macintosh computer,  
CameraWindow is displayed when a  
connection is established between the  
camera and computer.  
Index  
174  
     
Cover  
zzFor Windows, follow the steps introduced  
below.  
Before Use  
In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the  
taskbar.  
To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images  
From Canon Camera] on the screen displayed when you turn the camera on  
in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [Start] menu and choose  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzIn the screen that displays, click the [  
]
link to modify the program.  
Basic Guide  
zzChoose [Downloads Images From Canon  
Camera] and then click [OK].  
[All Programs]  
[Canon Utilities]  
[CameraWindow]  
[CameraWindow].  
Advanced Guide  
On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click  
the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop).  
Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your  
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations  
apply.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until  
camera images are accessible.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzDouble-click [  
].  
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.  
P Mode  
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be  
saved.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.  
Playback Mode  
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,  
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image  
file sizes.  
CameraWindow  
3 Save the images to the  
computer.  
zzClick [Import Images from Camera], and  
then click [Import Untransferred Images].  
zzImages are now saved to the Pictures  
folder on the computer, in separate  
folders named by date.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as  
movie editing.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzAfter images are saved, close  
CameraWindow, press the <1> button  
to turn the camera off, and unplug the  
cable.  
Index  
zzFor instructions on viewing images on a  
computer, refer to “Software Instruction  
Manual” (=173).  
175  
Cover  
Still Images  
Movies  
3 Turn the printer on.  
Before Use  
Printing Images  
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On  
the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders  
for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for  
photobooks.  
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the  
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by  
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.  
4 Turn the camera on.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
zzPress the <1> button to turn the camera  
on.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
5 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
6 Access the printing screen.  
Still Images  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Easy Print  
7 Print the image.  
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible  
printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.  
P Mode  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [Print], and then  
press the <m> button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
1 Make sure the camera and  
zzPrinting now begins.  
Playback Mode  
printer are off.  
zzTo print other images, repeat the above  
procedures starting from step 5 after  
printing is finished.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
2 Connect the camera to the  
printer.  
Setting Menu  
zzWhen you are finished printing, turn the  
camera and printer off and disconnect  
the cable.  
zzOpen the cover. Holding the smaller  
cable plug in the orientation shown, insert  
the plug fully into the camera terminal.  
zzConnect the larger cable plug to the  
printer. For other connection details, refer  
to the printer manual.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see  
RAW images cannot be printed.  
Index  
176  
         
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Configuring Print Settings  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Cropping Images before Printing  
1 Access the printing screen.  
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area  
instead of the entire image.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”  
Basic Guide  
(=176) to access the screen at left.  
Advanced Guide  
1 Choose [Cropping].  
2 Configure the settings.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial to choose an item, and  
then choose an option by pressing the  
<q><r> buttons.  
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print  
Settings” (=177) to access the printing  
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the  
<m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzA cropping frame is now displayed,  
indicating the image area to print.  
Default  
Date  
Matches current printer settings.  
Prints images with the date added.  
Prints images with the file number added.  
Prints images with both the date and file number added.  
P Mode  
2 Adjust the cropping frame as  
needed.  
zzTo resize the frame, move the zoom  
lever.  
File No.  
Both  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Off  
Default  
Off  
Matches current printer settings.  
zzTo move the frame, press the  
<o><p><q><r> buttons.  
zzTo rotate the frame, turn the <7> dial.  
zzWhen finished, press the <m> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Uses information from the time of shooting to print under  
optimal settings.  
Setting Menu  
On  
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.  
Accessories  
9
10  
3 Print the image.  
zzFollow step 7 in “Easy Print” (=176)  
to print.  
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.  
Appendix  
Cropping  
Specify a desired image area to print (=177).  
Index  
Paper  
Settings  
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details  
(=178).  
Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some  
aspect ratios.  
Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with  
[Date Stamp  
] selected.  
177  
       
Cover  
4 Choose a layout.  
Still Images  
Before Use  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an option.  
zzWhen choosing [N-up], press the  
<q><r> buttons to specify the number of  
images per sheet.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing  
1 Choose [Paper Settings].  
zzAfter following step 1 in “Configuring Print  
Settings” (=177) to access the printing  
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and  
press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <m> button.  
Camera Basics  
5 Print the image.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Available Layout Options  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a paper size.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an option, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Default  
Matches current printer settings.  
Bordered  
Borderless  
N-up  
Prints with blank space around the image.  
Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Choose how many images to print per sheet.  
Prints images for identification purposes.  
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of  
4:3.  
Playback Mode  
ID Photo  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Choose the print size.  
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.  
3 Choose a type of paper.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an option, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Fixed Size  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
178  
   
Cover  
Movies  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Printing Movie Scenes  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Printing ID Photos  
1 Access the printing screen.  
zzFollow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”  
(=176) to choose a movie. The screen  
at left is displayed.  
1 Choose [ID Photo].  
Basic Guide  
zzFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing  
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”  
(=178), choose [ID Photo] and press  
the <m> button.  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [c], and then press  
the <m> button. The screen at left is  
displayed.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose the long and short side  
length.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an item. Choose the  
length by pressing the <q><r> buttons,  
and then press the <m> button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2 Choose a printing method.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial to choose [ ], and then  
press the <q><r> buttons to choose the  
printing method.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
3 Choose the printing area.  
zzFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images before  
Printing” (=177) to choose the printing  
area.  
Playback Mode  
3 Print the image.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Movie Printing Options  
Setting Menu  
Single  
Prints the current scene as a still image.  
Accessories  
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of  
paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed  
time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].  
9
10  
4 Print the image.  
Sequence  
Appendix  
Index  
To cancel printing in progress, press the <m> button.  
[ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge-  
compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.  
179  
Cover  
Still Images  
Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the  
printer or photo development service, in some cases.  
[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory  
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.  
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all  
previous settings.  
Before Use  
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Batch printing (=182) and ordering prints from a photo development  
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a  
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies,  
as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date  
twice.  
Camera Basics  
RAW images cannot be included in print list.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File  
No.] at the same time.  
Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible  
printers (sold separately).  
The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the  
[3] tab (=14).  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Still Images  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Configuring Print Settings  
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and  
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzPress the <n> button, and then  
choose [Print Settings] on the [2] tab.  
Choose and configure items as desired  
(=25).  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
Standard One image is printed per sheet.  
9
10  
Print Type  
Index  
Both  
On  
Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet.  
Both standard and index formats are printed.  
Images are printed with the shooting date.  
Appendix  
Index  
Date  
Off  
On  
Images are printed with the file number.  
File No.  
Off  
On  
All image print list settings are cleared after printing.  
Clear DPOF  
data  
Off  
180  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Still Images  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images  
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
for Individual Images” (=181), choose  
[Select Range] and press the <m>  
button.  
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].  
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [2] tab,  
and then press the <m> button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
zzFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”  
(=112) to specify images.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons to choose  
[Order], and then press the <m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2 Choose an image.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
zzYou can now specify the number of  
copies.  
Still Images  
P Mode  
Setting Up Printing for All Images  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzIf you specify index printing for the image,  
it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel  
index printing for the image, press the  
<m> button again. [ ] is no longer  
displayed.  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
for Individual Images” (=181), choose  
[Select All Images] and press the <m>  
button.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
3 Specify the number of prints.  
zzPress the <o><p> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to specify the number of prints  
(up to 99).  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
zzTo set up printing for other images and  
specify the number of prints, repeat steps  
2 – 3.  
Index  
zzPrinting quantity cannot be specified for  
index prints. You can only choose which  
images to print, by following step 2.  
zzWhen finished, press the <n> button  
to return to the menu screen.  
181  
     
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Adding Images to a Photobook  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Clearing All Images from the Print List  
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images  
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,  
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering  
printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.  
zzFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing  
for Individual Images” (=181), choose  
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>  
button.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Choosing a Selection Method  
Camera Basics  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
zzPress the <n> button, choose  
[Photobook Set-up] on the [1] tab, and  
then choose how you will select images.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
P Mode  
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zzWhen images have been added to the  
print list (=180 181), the screen  
at left is displayed after you connect  
the camera to a PictBridge-compatible  
printer. Press the <o><p> buttons to  
choose [Print now], and then simply press  
the <m> button to print the images in the  
print list.  
[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory  
card has print settings that were configured on another camera.  
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all  
previous settings.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software Instruction  
Manual” (=173) and the printer manual for further information.  
Accessories  
9
10  
zzAny DPOF print job that you temporarily  
stop will be resumed from the next image.  
Appendix  
Index  
182  
         
Cover  
Still Images  
Still Images  
Before Use  
Adding All Images to a Photobook  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Adding Images Individually  
[Select All Images] and press the <m>  
button.  
1 Choose [Select].  
Basic Guide  
[Select] and press the <m> button.  
Advanced Guide  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Still Images  
2 Choose an image.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose an image, and then  
press the <m> button.  
Removing All Images from a Photobook  
P Mode  
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>  
button.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
zz[ ] is displayed.  
Playback Mode  
zzTo remove the image from the photobook,  
press the <m> button again. [ ] is no  
longer displayed.  
zzPress the <q><r> buttons or turn the  
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press  
the <m> button.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
zzRepeat this process to specify other  
images.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
zzWhen finished, press the <n> button  
to return to the menu screen.  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
183  
Cover  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
10  
Basic Guide  
Appendix  
Advanced Guide  
Helpful information when using the camera  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Troubleshooting............................................. 185 Functions and Menu Tables.......................... 193 1Playback Tab Menu .......................................202  
On-Screen Messages..................................... 188  
2Print Tab Menu...............................................202  
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode.......193  
FUNC. Menu .......................................................195 Handling Precautions .................................... 203  
Playback Mode  
On-Screen Information .................................. 191  
Shooting (Information Display)............................191  
Playback (Detailed Information Display) .............192  
4Shooting Tab Menu........................................198  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Specifications................................................. 203  
3Set Up Tab Menu ...........................................202  
My Menu Tab Menu.......................................202  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
184  
 
Cover  
Troubleshooting  
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.  
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer  
Support Help Desk.  
Shooting  
Before Use  
Cannot shoot.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
In Playback mode (=101), press the shutter button halfway (=22).  
Nothing is displayed (=32).  
Strange display on the screen under low light (=23).  
Strange display on the screen when shooting.  
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are  
recorded in movies.  
Basic Guide  
Power  
Advanced Guide  
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.  
Confirm that the battery pack is charged (=12).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (=13).  
Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (=14).  
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a  
cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.  
The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED  
lighting.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
No date stamp is added to images.  
Configure the [Date Stamp  
added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/Time]  
setting (=14).  
Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (=201) in which this setting cannot  
be configured (=38).  
] setting (=38). Note that date stamps are not  
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.  
P Mode  
Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a  
little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch  
any metal objects.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after  
charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.  
Playback Mode  
[h] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and  
shooting is not possible (=32).  
The lens is not retracted.  
Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover,  
turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (=14).  
Wi-Fi Functions  
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (=32).  
Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (=89).  
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [h] (=85).  
Increase the ISO speed (=70).  
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you  
should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=89).  
Setting Menu  
The battery pack is swollen.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if  
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon  
Customer Support Help Desk.  
Appendix  
Shots are out of focus.  
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way  
down to shoot (=22).  
Index  
Display on a TV  
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (=165).  
Make sure subjects are within focusing range (=205).  
Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (=48).  
Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.  
Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (=81, 85).  
185  
   
Cover  
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the  
shutter button is pressed halfway.  
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the  
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button  
halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.  
Subjects are affected by red-eye (=45).  
Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (=49) to activate the red-eye reduction lamp  
(=3) in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction  
lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Edit images using red-eye correction (=121).  
Basic Guide  
Subjects in shots look too dark.  
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting  
is slower.  
Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=154).  
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [h] (=85).  
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=68).  
Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (=72, 120).  
Use AE lock or spot metering (=69).  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.  
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each  
Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab Menu” (=193 201).  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.  
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [!] (=29).  
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=68).  
Use AE lock or spot metering (=69).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
The Babies or Children icon does not display.  
The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face  
information (=39). If the icons still do not display even when you set the birthday,  
re-register face information (=39), or make sure that the date/time are set  
correctly (=151).  
P Mode  
Reduce the lighting on subjects.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (=32).  
Shoot within flash range (=205).  
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output  
level (=86, 94).  
Cannot shoot planetarium stars well in [ ] mode.  
Shoot actual starry skies instead.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Shooting Movies  
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.  
Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-  
speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length  
of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (=153,  
205).  
Increase the ISO speed (=70).  
Setting Menu  
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.  
Shoot within flash range (=205).  
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [!] (=29).  
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output  
level (=86, 94).  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.  
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the  
memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.  
Index  
White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots.  
This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.  
Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=154).  
Lower the image quality (=46).  
Shots look grainy.  
Lower the ISO speed (=70).  
Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (=205).  
High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (=53).  
186  
Cover  
Zooming is not possible.  
Before Use  
Computer  
Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (=62).  
Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (=57) and [ ] (=66)  
modes.  
Cannot transfer images to a computer.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the  
transfer speed as follows.  
Subjects look distorted.  
Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Basic Guide  
Press the <1> button to enter Playback mode. Hold the <n> button down as  
m
you press the <o> and < > buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press  
Advanced Guide  
the <q><r> buttons to choose [B], and then press the <m> button.  
Playback  
Camera Basics  
Wi-Fi  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Playback is not possible.  
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the < > button.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or  
alter the folder structure. Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (=173) for details  
on folder structure and file names.  
The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try  
again.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display  
according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback.  
Playback stops, or audio skips.  
Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the  
camera (=154).  
There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that  
have slow read speeds.  
P Mode  
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,  
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Cannot add a device/destination.  
Playback Mode  
A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase  
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/  
destinations (=147).  
Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (=127).  
To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on your  
When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip  
if computer performance is inadequate.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Sound is not played during movies.  
Adjust the volume (=102) if you have activated [Mute] (=150) or the sound in  
the movie is faint.  
Setting Menu  
smartphone (=130).  
Accessories  
9
10  
No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (=57), [ ] (=63), or [ ] (=66)  
mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.  
To add a computer, first install the CameraWindow application on your computer. Also  
check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (=131, 133, 134).  
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave  
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.  
Appendix  
Memory Card  
The memory card is not recognized.  
Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (=21).  
Index  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the  
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.  
Cannot connect to the access point.  
Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera  
(=204). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a  
supported channel manually.  
187  
Cover  
Cannot send images.  
The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on  
the destination device and resend the images.  
On-Screen Messages  
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the  
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.  
No memory card  
The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card  
facing the correct way (=13).  
Basic Guide  
RAW images cannot be sent. In [ ] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.  
Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you  
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent  
using Image Sync via an access point (=145). Before moving or renaming these  
image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent  
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.  
Advanced Guide  
Memory card locked  
The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the  
write-protect tab to the unlocked position (=13).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Cannot record!  
Cannot resize images for sending.  
Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size.  
Movies cannot be resized.  
Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a  
memory card facing the correct way (=13).  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Memory card error (=154)  
If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported  
memory card (=2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (=13), contact  
a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
P Mode  
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.  
Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or [  
]
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
to reduce sending time (=142).  
Movies may take a long time to send.  
Insufficient space on card  
Playback Mode  
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave  
ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. Note  
that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is displayed.  
or edit images (=118 121). Either erase unneeded images (=114) or insert a  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the  
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.  
Setting Menu  
Charge the battery (=12)  
No Image.  
Accessories  
When sending images to a computer from a memory card with a large amount  
of images (approximately 1,000), the connection may be disrupted. Import any  
necessary images to a computer, and then reduce the number of images on the  
memory card by erasing unnecessary images.  
9
10  
The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.  
Appendix  
Protected! (=111)  
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play  
back MOV  
Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.  
Index  
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the  
camera or giving it to someone else.  
Reset the Wi-Fi settings (=148).  
It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer,  
or images shot with another camera.  
188  
 
Cover  
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/  
Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to  
category/Unselectable image./No identification information  
The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already  
edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*)  
functions are not available for movies.  
Edit ID Info* (=108 109), Magnify* (=109), Smart Shuffle* (=110), Rotate  
(=116), Favorites (=117), Edit* (=118 121), Print List* (=180), and  
Photobook Set-up* (=182).  
Lens Error  
Before Use  
This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used  
in dusty or sandy locations.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,  
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
Basic Guide  
A camera error was detected (error number)  
If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have  
been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.  
Advanced Guide  
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,  
write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help  
Desk.  
Grouped images cannot be processed (=77).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Invalid selection range  
When specifying a range for image selection (=112, 115, 181), you attempted to  
choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
File Error  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Correct printing (=176) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or  
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is  
connected to the printer.  
Exceeded selection limit  
More than 998 images were selected for Print List (=180) or Photobook Set-up  
(=182). Choose 998 images or less.  
Print List (=180) or Photobook Set-up (=182) settings could not be saved  
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Print error  
Check the paper size setting (=178). If this error message is displayed when the  
setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again.  
Playback Mode  
You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (=111), Erase  
(=114), Favorites (=117), Print List (=180), or Photobook Set-up (=182).  
Ink absorber full  
Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink  
absorber replacement.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Communication error  
An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented  
printing or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially  
available USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer  
card slot.  
Setting Menu  
Wi-Fi  
Connection failed  
No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (=134).  
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Naming error!  
The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest  
supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and  
the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached.  
On the [3] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (=154), or format the  
memory card (=153).  
connection.  
Index  
Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.  
Cannot determine access point  
The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try  
reconnecting again.  
189  
Cover  
No access points found  
Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.  
Receiving failed  
Naming error!  
Before Use  
When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have  
been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.  
When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the  
correct SSID.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Insufficient space on server  
Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space.  
Save the images sent via Image Sync (=145) to your computer.  
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings  
Check the access point security settings (=134).  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
IP address conflict  
Check network settings  
Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current  
network settings.  
Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed  
You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices,  
and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the  
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.  
P Mode  
Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Sending failed  
Memory card error  
If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted  
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Receiving failed  
Insufficient space on card  
There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive  
images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card  
with sufficient space.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Receiving failed  
Memory card locked  
Index  
The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to  
the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.  
190  
Cover  
Recordable shots  
(=204)  
Movie resolution  
(=46)  
Digital zoom  
magnification  
(=35), Digital  
tele-converter  
(=80)  
Remaining time  
(=205)  
AF frame (=81),  
Spot AE point frame  
(=69)  
Date stamp  
(=38)  
DR correction  
(=73)  
AE lock (=69),  
FE lock (=87)  
Shutter speed  
(=92, 93)  
Electronic level  
(=47)  
Aperture value  
(=93)  
Exposure  
compensation level  
(=68)  
ISO speed (=70)  
Grid lines (=95)  
Hybrid Auto mode  
(=31)  
Zoom bar (=29)  
Wind filter (=32)  
Time zone (=151)  
Image stabilization  
(=89)  
MF indicator  
(=78)  
Exposure shift bar  
(=65)  
Exposure level  
(=93)  
Exposure  
compensation bar  
(=68)  
On-Screen Information  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Shooting (Information Display)  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Histogram (=103)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Focusing range  
(=53, 78),  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Blink detection  
(=48)  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Battery Level  
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.  
Shooting mode  
(=193), Scene  
icon (=33)  
Flash mode  
(=85), LED light  
(=169)  
Red-eye correction  
(=45)  
Flash exposure  
compensation /  
Flash output level  
(=86, 94)  
Metering method  
(=69), ND filter  
(=73), Shadow  
correction (=73)  
My Colors (=75)  
Eco mode (=152)  
Camera shake  
warning (=32)  
Self-timer (=36)  
IS mode icon  
(=34)  
Battery level  
(=191)  
Still image  
compression  
(=89),  
Resolution (=45)  
Setting Menu  
Display  
Details  
Accessories  
9
10  
Sufficient charge  
Drive mode  
Slightly depleted, but sufficient  
Appendix  
(=76), AEB  
shooting (=72),  
Focus bracketing  
(=80)  
White balance  
(=74), Mercury  
lamp correction  
(=46)  
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon  
Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately  
Index  
(Blinking red)  
[Charge the battery]  
191  
       
Cover  
Group playback  
Compression (image  
quality) (=89)  
/ Resolution  
Still images:  
Playback (Detailed Information Display)  
Before Use  
(=108), Image quality  
/ Frame rate (movies)  
(=46, 66)  
Resolution (=204)  
Movies: Playback  
time (=205)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
(=45), Digest  
movies (=104),  
RAW (=88),  
File size  
Basic Guide  
MP4 (movies)  
Advanced Guide  
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV  
(=163).  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Current image no. /  
Total no. of images  
Histogram (=103)  
Battery level  
(=191)  
Wi-Fi signal strength  
(=142)  
Image editing  
(=118 121),  
Movie compression  
(=123)  
Favorites (=117)  
Protection (=111)  
Folder number - File  
number (=154)  
Shooting date/time  
(=14)  
Shutter speed  
(=92, 93)  
Aperture value  
(=93)  
White balance  
correction (=74),  
Mercury lamp  
correction (=46)  
My Colors (=75,  
120)  
Exit  
P Mode  
Play  
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the <q><r> buttons or turn  
the <7> dial. No sound is played.)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Exposure  
compensation level  
(=68), Exposure  
shift level (=65)  
ISO speed (=70),  
Playback speed  
(=57)  
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (=123) (To continue skipping backward,  
keep holding down the <m> button.)  
Playback Mode  
Focusing range  
(
=53, 78),  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the <m> button.)  
Manual focus  
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the <m> button.)  
(=78)  
ND filter (=73)  
Red-eye correction  
(=45, 121)  
High ISO NR  
(=71)  
DR correction  
(=73)  
Setting Menu  
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=123) (To continue skipping forward, keep  
holding down the <m> button.)  
Accessories  
Metering method  
9
10  
)
*
c
Edit (=122)  
Appendix  
Flash output  
level (=94),  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
(=86)  
White balance  
(=74)  
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (=123))  
Index  
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer  
(=176).  
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.  
Shadow correction  
(=73)  
During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or  
Shooting mode  
next clip) by pressing the <q><r> buttons.  
(=193)  
192  
   
Cover  
Functions and Menu Tables  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode  
Basic Guide  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
DBMG  
Advanced Guide  
I
SPt  
E
Function  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Exposure Compensation (=68)  
ISO Speed (=70)  
AUTO  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
80 – 12800  
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Flash (=85)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
h
Z
!
2
2
2
*
*
*
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Shutter Speed (=92, 93)  
Aperture Value (=93)  
Program Shift (=69)  
AE Lock (=69)/FE Lock (=87)*3  
AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (=65)*4  
Playback Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
O
AF Lock (when assigned to the < > or movie button)  
(=85)  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories  
9
10  
Focusing Range (=53, 78)  
Appendix  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
*
*
e
Index  
O
O
8
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Manual Focus (=78)  
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
*2 Not available, but switches to [Z] in some cases.  
*3 FE lock not available in [!] flash mode.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*4 In modes other than [E], AE lock and Exposure shift are only available when  
shooting movies.  
193  
     
Cover  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Before Use  
DBMG  
I
SPt  
E
Common Camera  
Operations  
Function  
1
1
1
1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Move AF Frame (=81)  
Resize AF Frame (=81)  
Face Select (=84)  
Set Tracking AF Subject (=82)  
Screen Display (=23)  
Display Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide  
O
Camera Basics  
1
1
O
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
Display 1  
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1
1
Display 2  
*
*
Other Shooting  
Modes  
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
194  
Cover  
FUNC. Menu  
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Common Camera  
Operations  
DBMG  
I
SPt  
E
Basic Guide  
Function  
DR Correction (=73)  
Advanced Guide  
1
1
1
1
1
1
O
O
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
O
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Shadow Correct (=73)  
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
O
O
White Balance (=74)  
P Mode  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
S
h
2
2
*
*
O
O
Playback Mode  
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
White Balance Correction (=74)  
My Colors (=75)  
Wi-Fi Functions  
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Setting Menu  
3
3
4
*
*
*
Bracketing (=72, 80)  
Accessories  
9
10  
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix  
O
Index  
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
*2 Advanced settings not available.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*3 White balance is not available.  
*4 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and  
skin tone.  
195  
   
Cover  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Before Use  
DBMG  
I
SPt  
E
Common Camera  
Operations  
Function  
Drive Mode (=76)  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
2
1
1
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2
1
1
*
*
*
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Self-Timer (=36)  
1
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
*
*
][$  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Self-Timer Settings (=37)  
1
1
Delay*3  
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
P Mode  
Shots*4  
*
*
1
1
*
*
Flash Exposure Compensation (=86)  
Flash Output Level (=94)  
Metering Method (=69)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
1
1
*
*
O
Playback Mode  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
*
*
Wi-Fi Functions  
ND Filter (=73)  
1
1
Setting Menu  
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories  
9
10  
Still Image Aspect Ratio (=44)  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix  
1
1
*
*
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Index  
1
1
*
*
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*2 [ ] is set with [f], AF lock, or [t].  
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.  
*4 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.  
196  
Cover  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Before Use  
DBMG  
I
SPt  
E
Common Camera  
Operations  
Function  
Image Type (=88)  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide  
Resolution (=45)  
1
1
1
1
Advanced Guide  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Compression (=89)  
Movie Quality (=46, 66)  
1
1
1
1
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1
1
1
1
1
1
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P Mode  
2
*
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
O
Playback Mode  
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (=57).  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
197  
 
Cover  
4Shooting Tab Menu  
Before Use  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Common Camera  
Operations  
DBMG  
I
SPt  
E
Basic Guide  
Function  
AF Frame (=81)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Advanced Guide  
Face AiAF  
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2
Tracking AF  
FlexiZone/Center*3  
*
O
O
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Digital Zoom (=35)  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1
1
1
1
1
1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Standard  
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Off  
1.5/2.0x  
AF-Point Zoom (=47)  
P Mode  
1
1
1
1
On  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Servo AF (=83)  
Playback Mode  
1
1
1
1
On  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4
Off  
O
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Wi-Fi Functions  
Continuous AF (=84)  
1
1
1
1
On  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Setting Menu  
Off  
O
O
O
O
AF-assist Beam (=48)  
Accessories  
9
10  
1
1
1
1
On  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Appendix  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
MF-Point Zoom (=79)  
1
1
1
1
Index  
Off  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2x/4x  
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
*2 Only available by pressing the <o> button (=38).  
*3 [FlexiZone] in [G], [M], [B], and [D] modes, otherwise [Center].  
*4 [On] when subject movement is detected.  
198  
 
Cover  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Before Use  
DBMG  
I
SPt  
E
Common Camera  
Operations  
Function  
Safety MF (=79)  
1
1
1
1
On  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide  
MF Peaking Settings (=79)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Peaking  
On/Off  
High/Low  
Red/Blue/Yellow  
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics  
Level  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Color  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Flash Control (=45, 49, 86, 87, 94)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Auto  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Flash Mode  
Manual  
O
Flash Exp. Comp  
Flash Output  
O
P Mode  
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
1st-curtain  
Shutter Sync.  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2nd-curtain  
Playback Mode  
On  
Red-Eye Corr.  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Wi-Fi Functions  
Red-Eye Lamp  
On/Off  
On  
O
Setting Menu  
Safety FE  
Off  
O
ISO Auto Settings (=71)  
Max ISO Speed  
Accessories  
9
10  
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
Rate of Change  
Appendix  
High ISO NR (=71)  
Low/Standard/High  
Hg Lamp Corr. (=46)  
On/Off  
1
1
Index  
O
*
*
O
O
O
O
Spot AE Point (=69)  
Center/AF Point  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
199  
Cover  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Before Use  
DBMG  
I
SPt  
E
Common Camera  
Operations  
Function  
Safety Shift (=93)  
1
1
1
1
On  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide  
Wind Filter (=32)  
Auto/Off  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Review image after shooting (=49)  
Off/Quick  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
O
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Display Time  
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.  
Hold  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Display Info  
Off/Detailed  
O
Blink Detection (=48)  
P Mode  
1
1
1
1
On  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Custom Display (=95)  
1
1
Playback Mode  
Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram  
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Night Display (=90)  
On/Off  
Wi-Fi Functions  
1
1
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
FUNC. Menu Layout (=98)  
IS Settings (=89)  
Off  
Setting Menu  
1
1
O
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Accessories  
9
10  
1
1
IS Mode  
Continuous  
*
*
1
1
Shoot Only  
*
*
Appendix  
1
1
1
2
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
Dynamic IS  
1
1
Index  
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
200  
Cover  
Shooting Mode  
K
E
Before Use  
DBMG  
I
SPt  
E
Common Camera  
Operations  
Function  
Converter (=166)  
None/TC-DC58E  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Basic Guide  
Date Stamp  
Off  
(=38)  
1
1
1
1
Advanced Guide  
*
*
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Date/Date & Time  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Digest Type (=31)  
Include Stills/No Stills  
O
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Save  
Stills (=64)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
On/Off  
O
Star Emphasis (=62)  
On/Off  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P Mode  
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Face ID Settings (=39)  
Set z7Func. (=96)  
Set Shortcut button (=97)  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
1
1
*
*
1
1
*
*
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Playback Mode  
1
1
Set  
button (=97)  
*
*
O
O
Save Settings (=99)  
Wi-Fi Functions  
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.  
O
Available or set automatically. Not available.  
-
Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (=39) may not be displayed in  
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
201  
   
Cover  
3Set Up Tab Menu  
1Playback Tab Menu  
Before Use  
Item  
List/Play Digest Movies  
Smart Shuffle  
Slideshow  
Ref. Page  
Item  
Ref. Page  
Item  
Ref. Page  
Item  
File Numbering  
Create Folder  
Units  
Ref. Page  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Resize  
Mute  
Basic Guide  
My Colors  
Volume  
Face ID Info  
Transition Effect  
Index Effect  
Sound Options  
Hints & Tips  
Date/Time  
Advanced Guide  
Erase  
Electronic Level  
Video System  
Ctrl via HDMI  
Wi-Fi Settings  
Copyright Info  
Certification Logo Display  
Language  
Camera Basics  
Protect  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rotate  
Scroll Display  
Group Images  
Auto Rotate  
Time Zone  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Favorites  
Lens Retract  
Eco Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Photobook Set-up  
i-Contrast  
Resume  
Power Saving  
LCD Brightness  
Start-up Image  
Format  
P Mode  
Red-Eye Correction  
Cropping  
Set Shortcut button  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Reset All  
Playback Mode  
2Print Tab Menu  
Wi-Fi Functions  
My Menu Tab Menu  
Item  
Ref. Page  
Item  
Select All Images  
Clear All Selections  
Print Settings  
Ref. Page  
Setting Menu  
Print  
Item  
Ref. Page  
Select Images & Qty.  
Select Range  
My Menu settings  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
202  
 
Cover  
Handling Precautions  
Specifications  
Before Use  
The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or  
subjecting it to strong impact.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Camera Effective  
Pixels (Max.)  
Approx. 12.1 million pixels  
Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that  
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or  
erase image data.  
5x zoom: 6.1 (W) – 30.5 (T) mm  
(35mm film equivalent: 28 (W) – 140 (T) mm)  
Basic Guide  
Lens Focal Length  
Advanced Guide  
Real-image type optical zoom viewfinder  
Dioptric Adjustment Range: –3.0 to +1.0 m-1 (dpt)  
Coverage: Approx. 80%  
Viewfinder  
If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry  
soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.0-type color TFT LCD  
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or  
screen.  
LCD Monitor  
File Format  
Data Type  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1)  
compliant  
Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,  
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.  
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon Original))  
Movies: MP4 (Video: H.264; Audio: MPEG2 AAC-LC (stereo))  
P Mode  
To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden  
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm  
environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and  
let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Hi-speed USB  
HDMI output  
Analog audio output (stereo)  
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)  
Interface  
Playback Mode  
If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.  
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove  
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has  
evaporated before resuming use.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Battery Pack NB-10L  
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80  
Power Source  
Setting Menu  
Dimensions (Based  
on CIPA Guidelines)  
108.8 x 75.9 x 40.3 mm (4.28 x 2.99 x 1.59 in.)  
Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining  
charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar  
container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over extended periods  
(about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance.  
Accessories  
9
10  
Approx. 356 g (approx. 12.56 oz.; including the battery pack  
and memory card)  
Approx. 314 g (approx. 11.08 oz.; camera body only)  
Weight (Based on  
CIPA Guidelines)  
Appendix  
Index  
203  
   
Cover  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Standards  
Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card  
Before Use  
IEEE802.11b/g/n*  
*2.4 GHz band only  
Number of Shots per Memory Card  
(Approx. shots)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Compression  
Ratio  
Recording Pixels  
8 GB  
32 GB  
Transmission  
Methods  
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)  
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)  
Basic Guide  
1379  
5568  
(Large)  
12M/4000x3000  
Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2  
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
*2 Wi-Fi Certified IBSS  
Advanced Guide  
Communication  
Modes  
2192  
2431  
8850  
9814  
Camera Basics  
(Medium 1)  
6M/2816x2112  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 – 11 (PC2035/PC2059) or 1 – 13 (PC2010)  
Model numbers indicated in parentheses (=210)  
3721  
15020  
30040  
52176  
Supported Channels  
Security  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
7442  
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),  
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)  
(Medium 2)  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2M/1600x1200  
12927  
27291  
40937  
110150  
165225  
P Mode  
(Small)  
0.3M/640x480  
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time  
Screen On  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Approx. 360  
Approx. 770  
Approx. 480  
RAW Images  
4000x3000  
446  
1804  
Number of Shots  
Screen Off  
Playback Mode  
Eco Mode On  
The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change  
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Movie Recording  
Time*1  
Screen On  
Screen On  
Approx. 1 hour  
The values in the table are based on 4:3 aspect ratio. If the aspect ratio is changed  
(=44), more images can be shot because the data size per image will be smaller  
than with 4:3 images. However, since [ ] 16:9 images have a setting of 1920 x 1080  
pixels, their data size will be larger than 4:3 images.  
Setting Menu  
Continuous  
Shooting*2  
Approx. 1 hour, 40 minutes  
Approx. 7 hours  
Accessories  
9
10  
Playback Time  
Appendix  
*1Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as  
shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.  
*2Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops  
automatically) repeatedly.  
Index  
The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the  
Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).  
Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less  
than mentioned above.  
Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.  
204  
     
Cover  
Before Use  
Recording Time per Memory Card  
Shooting Range  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Recording Time per Memory Card  
Maximum Wide Angle Maximum Telephoto  
Shooting Mode Focusing Range  
Image Quality  
(j)  
(i)  
8 GB  
32 GB  
1 cm – infinity  
(0.4 in. – infinity)  
40 cm – infinity  
(1.3 ft. – infinity)  
Basic Guide  
30 min. 03 sec.  
2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.  
43 min. 29 sec.  
2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec.  
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec.  
2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.  
8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.  
21 hr. 10 min. 33 sec.  
Advanced Guide  
5 cm – infinity  
(2.0 in. – infinity)  
40 cm – infinity  
(1.3 ft. – infinity)  
Camera Basics  
1 – 50 cm  
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
e*  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
1 cm – infinity  
(0.4 in. – infinity)  
40 cm – infinity  
(1.3 ft. – infinity)  
The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change  
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.  
Other modes  
f*  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
1 – 50 cm  
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)  
Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the  
recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in  
P Mode  
1.5 – 20 m  
(4.9 – 66 ft.)  
1.5 – 20 m  
(4.9 – 66 ft.)  
[
], [  
] or [  
], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [  
].  
8
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some  
memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.  
* Not available in some shooting modes.  
Playback Mode  
Flash Range  
Continuous Shooting Speed  
Continuous Shooting Mode  
W
Wi-Fi Functions  
50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)  
50 cm – 4.5 m (1.6 – 15 ft.)  
Maximum wide angle (j)  
Speed  
Setting Menu  
Approx. 12.2 shots/sec.  
Approx. 9.3 shots/sec.*  
Maximum telephoto (i)  
Accessories  
9
10  
Approx. 5.7 shots/sec.  
Approx. 5.9 shots/sec.  
Appendix  
Index  
* From the sixth shot.  
Based on Canon testing standards, using a 8 GB UHS-I memory card. Note that the  
number of shots will vary depending on subjects, the brand of memory card, and other  
factors.  
205  
         
Cover  
Shutter Speed  
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE  
Before Use  
Rated Input:  
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) 16 VA (100 V) – 22 VA (240 V),  
0.18 A (100 V) – 0.12 A (240 V)  
8.4 V DC, 0.7 A  
Approx. 1 hour 50 min. (when using NB-10L)  
Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two indicators)  
[
] mode, automatically set range  
1 – 1/4000 sec.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25,  
20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,  
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,  
1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,  
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,  
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,  
1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200, 1/4000  
Rated Output:  
Charging Time:  
Charge Indicator:  
Basic Guide  
Available values in [M] or [D] mode  
(sec.)*  
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)  
Advanced Guide  
Tele-Converter TC-DC58E (Sold Separately)  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Zoom Factor:  
Lens Construction:  
Thread Diameter:  
Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ69.0 x 36.5 mm (ɸ2.72 x 1.44 in.)  
Weight: Approx. 165 g (approx. 5.8 oz.)  
* Requires Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L.  
1.4x  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
* In [M] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available.  
5 elements in 3 groups  
58 mm*  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Aperture  
f/number  
f/1.8 – f/8.0 (W), f/2.8 – f/8.0 (T)  
P Mode  
f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0,  
f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0  
Available values in [B] mode*  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L (Sold Separately)  
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.  
Camera Mount:  
Thread Diameter:  
Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ63.8 x 54.8 mm (ɸ2.51 x 2.16 in.)  
Weight: Approx. 36 g (approx. 1.3 oz.)  
Bayonet  
58 mm  
Playback Mode  
Battery Pack NB-10L  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Type:  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.4 V DC  
920 mAh  
Setting Menu  
Nominal Voltage:  
Nominal Capacity:  
Charging Cycles:  
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)  
Dimensions:  
Weight:  
Filter Adapter FA-DC58D (Sold Separately)  
Approx. 300 times  
Accessories  
9
10  
Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ66.0 x 46.7 mm (ɸ2.60 x 1.84 in.)  
Weight:  
Approx. 58 g (approx. 2.0 oz.)  
32.5 x 45.4 x 15.1 mm (1.28 x 1.79 x 0.59 in.)  
Approx. 41 g (approx. 1.45 oz.)  
Appendix  
Bracket BKT-DC1 (Sold Separately)  
Index  
Dimensions (Max.): 220.0 x 32.0 x 19.0 mm (8.66 x 1.26 x 0.75 in.)  
Weight: Approx. 90 g (approx. 3.2 oz.)  
All data is based on tests by Canon.  
Camera specifications or appearance are subject to change without  
notice.  
206  
   
Cover  
Dynamic Range Correction ................. 73  
Slow synchro................................. 85  
Index  
FlexiZone (AF frame mode)................. 81  
Before Use  
E
Eco mode .......................................... 152  
Editing  
Focus bracketing................................. 80  
Focus check ...................................... 109  
Focusing  
Camera shake..................................... 89  
CameraWindow (computer)............... 131  
CameraWindow (smartphone)........... 130  
Common Camera  
Operations  
A
AC adapter kit............................ 160, 165  
Accessories ....................................... 160  
AEB shooting....................................... 72  
AE lock ................................................ 69  
AF frames............................................ 81  
AF lock................................................. 85  
Aspect ratio.......................................... 44  
Basic Guide  
Cropping.......................................119  
i-Contrast..................................... 120  
My Colors.................................... 120  
Red-eye correction...................... 121  
Resizing images...........................118  
AF frames...................................... 81  
AF lock .......................................... 85  
AF-point zoom............................... 47  
Face select.................................... 84  
MF peaking ................................... 79  
Servo AF ....................................... 83  
CANON iMAGE  
GATEWAY ......................... 125, 127, 128  
Advanced Guide  
Center (AF frame mode)...................... 81  
Clock.................................................... 27  
Color (white balance)........................... 74  
Compression ratio (image quality)....... 89  
Connecting via an access point......... 134  
Connecting without an access point.. 139  
Continuous shooting............................ 76  
Creative filters (shooting mode)........... 54  
Cropping.....................................119, 177  
Custom white balance......................... 74  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Editing or erasing connection  
information......................................... 147  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Focusing range  
AUTO mode  
(shooting mode)....................... 16, 23, 29  
Electronic level .................................... 47  
Erasing ...............................................114  
Error messages ................................. 188  
Exposure  
Macro ............................................ 78  
Quick............................................. 53  
Underwater macro......................... 53  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Av (shooting mode) ............................. 93  
P Mode  
Focus lock ........................................... 81  
Front dial...................................... 96, 107  
FUNC. menu  
B
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
AE lock.......................................... 69  
Compensation............................... 68  
FE lock .......................................... 87  
Background defocus  
(shooting mode)................................... 58  
Basic operations............................ 24  
Table............................................ 195  
Playback Mode  
Batteries  
Date/time (date/time battery)  
FUNC. menu layout............................. 98  
F
Battery charger.............................. 2, 160  
Battery pack  
D
Wi-Fi Functions  
Face AiAF (AF frame mode)................ 82  
Face ID................................................ 39  
Face select.......................................... 84  
Face self-timer (shooting mode).......... 61  
Favorites.............................................117  
FE lock................................................. 87  
File numbering................................... 154  
Fireworks (shooting mode).................. 53  
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode).......... 56  
Flash  
Date/time  
G
Setting Menu  
Charging........................................ 12  
Eco mode.................................... 152  
Level............................................ 191  
Power saving................................. 21  
Adding date stamps ...................... 38  
Changing....................................... 15  
Date/time battery........................... 15  
Settings ......................................... 14  
World clock.................................. 151  
GPS information display.................... 103  
Accessories  
9
10  
H
Black and white images....................... 75  
Blink detection..................................... 48  
Appendix  
Handheld nightscene  
(shooting mode)................................... 52  
DC coupler......................................... 165  
Index  
Defaults  
Reset all  
HDMI cable........................................ 162  
C
Digital tele-converter............................ 80  
Digital zoom......................................... 35  
Display language................................. 16  
DPOF................................................. 180  
Drive mode .......................................... 76  
High dynamic range  
(shooting mode)................................... 55  
C1/C2 (shooting mode) ....................... 99  
Camera  
Household power............................... 165  
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode)............... 31  
Deactivating flash.......................... 86  
Flash exposure compensation ...... 86  
On ................................................. 85  
Reset all ...................................... 157  
Camera access point mode............... 139  
207  
 
Cover  
Multi-area White Balance .................... 46  
My Colors .................................... 75, 120  
Resizing images.................................118  
Resolution (image size)....................... 45  
Rotating..............................................116  
Soft focus (shooting mode).................. 59  
Software  
I
Before Use  
i-Contrast..................................... 72, 120  
Installation................................... 131  
Saving images to a computer...... 174  
Image quality  
Compression ratio  
Common Camera  
Operations  
N
(image quality)  
Sounds .............................................. 150  
Star (shooting mode)........................... 62  
S
Saving images to a computer............ 144  
Screen  
ND filter................................................ 73  
Images  
Basic Guide  
Neck strap  
Strap  
Display period ............................... 49  
Erasing.........................................114  
Star nightscape (shooting mode) .. 62  
Star time-lapse movie (shooting  
mode)............................................ 63  
Star trails (shooting mode)............ 62  
Nostalgic (shooting mode)................... 56  
Advanced Guide  
Playback  
Viewing  
Display language........................... 16  
Icons.................................... 191, 192  
Protecting.....................................111  
P
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Indicator............................................... 27  
Menu  
FUNC. menu, Menu  
Package contents.................................. 2  
Photobook set-up .............................. 182  
PictBridge .................................. 162, 176  
Stereo AV cable................................. 165  
Strap................................................ 2, 12  
ISO speed............................................ 70  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Searching .......................................... 106  
Self-timer ............................................. 36  
Super slow motion movie  
(movie mode)....................................... 66  
L
Other Shooting  
Modes  
2-second self-timer........................ 37  
Customizing the self-timer............. 37  
Face self-timer (shooting mode) ... 61  
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) ... 60  
Playback  
Viewing  
Lamp.............................................. 48, 49  
Portrait (shooting mode)...................... 52  
Poster effect (shooting mode) ............. 55  
Power ................................................ 160  
Super vivid (shooting mode)................ 54  
P Mode  
M
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
T
Sending images................................. 142  
Sending images to a computer.......... 127  
Sending images to another camera... 126  
Sending images to a printer............... 127  
Sending images to a smartphone...... 126  
Sending images to Web services ...... 126  
Sepia tone images............................... 75  
Servo AF.............................................. 83  
Shadow correct.................................... 73  
Shooting  
Macro (focusing range)........................ 78  
Magnified display............................... 109  
Manual focus....................................... 78  
AC adapter kit  
Battery charger  
Battery pack  
Terminal............................. 163, 165, 176  
Toy camera effect (shooting mode) ..... 58  
Tracking AF ................................... 38, 82  
Traveling with the camera ................. 151  
Troubleshooting................................. 185  
TV display.......................................... 163  
Tv (shooting mode).............................. 92  
Playback Mode  
Memory cards........................................ 2  
Recording time............................ 205  
Menu  
Power saving....................................... 21  
Printing .............................................. 176  
Program AE......................................... 68  
Protecting ...........................................111  
P (shooting mode) ............................... 68  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Basic operations............................ 25  
Table............................................ 193  
Accessories  
9
10  
Mercury lamp correction...................... 46  
Metering method.................................. 69  
Miniature effect (shooting mode)......... 57  
Monochrome (shooting mode)............. 59  
Movies  
Appendix  
U
Q
Underwater macro (focusing range).... 53  
Underwater (shooting mode)............... 52  
Shooting date/time  
Date/time  
Quick (focusing range) ........................ 53  
Index  
Shooting information ............. 95, 191  
Slideshow...........................................110  
R
V
Smart Shuffle......................................110  
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) ........... 60  
Smile (shooting mode)......................... 60  
Snow (shooting mode)......................... 52  
Editing ......................................... 122  
Image quality  
(resolution/frame rate)............. 46, 66  
Recording time............................ 205  
RAW .................................................... 88  
Red-eye correction...................... 45, 121  
Reset all............................................. 157  
Viewfinder............................................ 22  
Viewing................................................ 18  
Image search .............................. 106  
M (shooting mode)............................... 93  
208  
Cover  
Index display ............................... 105  
Magnified display ........................ 109  
Single-image display..................... 18  
Slideshow.....................................110  
Smart Shuffle ...............................110  
TV display ................................... 163  
Before Use  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
W
White balance (color)........................... 74  
Wi-Fi  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connecting and sending  
images......................................... 126  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Wi-Fi functions................................... 124  
Wi-Fi menu ........................................ 133  
Wink self-timer (shooting mode).......... 60  
World clock........................................ 151  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Z
Zoom ....................................... 17, 29, 35  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
209  
Cover  
Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.  
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions  
Before Use  
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be  
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio  
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make  
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon  
accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of  
earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
The camera’s model number is PC2035/  
PC2059/PC2010. To identify your model,  
check the label on the bottom of the  
camera for a number beginning with PC.  
The built-in WLAN module model is written  
below.  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or  
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset  
the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Country/Region of Purchase  
U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan  
Other  
WLAN Module Model  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or  
theft of the product.  
WM222  
WM218  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from  
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product  
due to loss or theft of the product.  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.  
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the  
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for  
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than  
as described in this guide.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:  
Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical  
equipment or other electronic equipment.  
Setting Menu  
- Altering or modifying the product  
- Removing the certification labels from the product  
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other  
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.  
Accessories  
9
10  
According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export  
permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese  
government is necessary to export strategic resources or services  
(including this product) outside Japan.  
Appendix  
Index  
Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls  
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to  
or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.  
210  
   
Cover  
Unauthorized network access  
Radio Wave Interference Precautions  
Before Use  
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to  
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.  
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access  
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain  
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where  
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to  
cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).  
This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio  
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as  
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time  
as this product.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly  
secure your Wi-Fi network.  
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of  
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security  
settings.  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers  
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy  
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices  
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP  
enables PictBridge connections in network environments,  
and the camera is also compatible with this standard.  
Security Precautions  
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions  
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.  
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Only use networks you are authorized to use.  
Wi-Fi Functions  
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the  
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown  
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or  
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure  
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to  
connect to other unknown networks.  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may  
occur.  
Transmission monitoring  
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and  
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.  
211  
 
Cover  
Battery Charger CB-2LC  
FCC/IC Notice  
Before Use  
Model: PC2035 (including WLAN Module Model WM222, FCC ID: AZD222)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Battery Charger CB-2LCE  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
212  
Cover  
FCC Notice  
Before Use  
(Digital Camera, Model PC2035 systems)  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Basic Guide  
Advanced Guide  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Trademarks and Licensing  
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the  
U.S. and other countries.  
P Mode  
App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.  
The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.  
Accessories  
9
10  
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard  
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding  
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and  
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the  
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted  
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.  
Appendix  
Index  
213  
Cover  
Disclaimer  
Before Use  
Reprinting, transmitting, or storing in a retrieval system any part of this  
guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited.  
Common Camera  
Operations  
Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any time  
without prior notice.  
Basic Guide  
Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the  
actual equipment.  
Advanced Guide  
The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for damages  
due to mistaken operation of the products.  
Camera Basics  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Mode /  
Hybrid Auto Mode  
Other Shooting  
Modes  
P Mode  
Tv, Av, M, C1,  
and C2 Mode  
Playback Mode  
Wi-Fi Functions  
Setting Menu  
Accessories  
9
10  
Appendix  
Index  
214  

Whirlpool Ace082xh0 User Manual
Linear Barcode Reader Am Dpr User Manual
LG ACC98WK T User Manual
Lexmark X9350 User Manual
Lexmark All In One Printer X642 User Manual
KENWOOD NEXEDGE NX 322 User Manual
HP ELITEBOOK 1040 G4 User Manual
GE ARC13AHC User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 917.273780 User Manual
CANON TR8500 User Manual